Linux on IBM Eserver i5

Transcription

1 Front cover Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am SG Linux on IBM Eserver i5 Implementation Guide Planning and configuring the system for Linux servers on eserver i5 Installation guide of Linux distribution on eserver i5 Users guide for iseries Access for Linux Fredy Cruz Stacey Johnson Vaclav Matousek Vaseem Ansari Vlatko Kosturjak Yessong Johng ibm.com/redbooks

2

3 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388edno.fm International Technical Support Organization Linux on i5: Implementation Guide May 2005 SG

4 6388edno.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page vii. First Edition (May 2005) This edition applies to i5/os V5R3, SLES 9 and RHEL 4. This document created or updated on May 9, Copyright International Business Machines Corporation All rights reserved. Note to U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights -- Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

5 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388TOC.fm Contents Notices vii Trademarks viii Preface ix The team that wrote this redbook ix Become a published author xi Comments welcome xi Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i Concepts and terminology eserver i Hardware management console Logical partitions Processor concepts I/O pools Virtualization and the virtualization engine Virtualization engine (VE) platform technologies Virtualization engine platform services Virtual I/O versus direct I/O Virtual I/O server LPAR Validation Tool Brief intro to Linux and Linux on i Differences between legacy iseries and eserver i eserver i5 editions eserver i5 model 520 editions eserver i5 model 550 editions eserver i5 model 570 editions eserver i5 model 595 editions Linux enhancements on eserver i Where to go for more information Chapter 2. Linux partition planning guide Hardware requirements for Linux logical partition Minimum configuration requirements Communication options Supported hardware resources Power control and console options Power control Linux console options System sizing for the Linux partition System configuration plan validation LPAR Validation Tool Chapter 3. System configuration HMC and Licensed Internal Code update HMC code update Licensed Internal Code update Configuring Linux partition Creating a logical partition using HMC console Copyright IBM Corp All rights reserved. iii

6 6388TOC.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am i/5 OS side configuration steps Configuring directly attached network card for Linux partition Chapter 4. Linux installation Pre-requisite tasks for the installation Configuring virtual LAN connection Setting the NWSD parameters for initial Linux installation SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 installation using GUI mode SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 installation using HMC terminal Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 installation using GUI mode Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 installation using HMC terminal Post installation steps: Linux DynamicRM and error log analysis RPMs DynamicRM and ServiceRM RPMs Error log analysis and RTAS Chapter 5. Administration and operations Starting and stopping Linux partition Linux partition with virtual I/O via NWSD Linux partition with direct I/O Checking Linux partition resources From HMC From Linux OS Linux administration using Webmin Webmin installation Using Webmin for Linux administration tasks i5/os administration task related Linux setting Invoking DST from HMC Configuring directly attached network adapter to Linux partition Managing disk space using LVM for Linux on i Backup and recovery Backup strategy for Linux partition i5/os oriented backup Linux oriented backup HMC backup i5/os oriented restore Linux oriented restore HMC profiles restore Troubleshooting HMC error reporting Common errors with Linux installation Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i Planning for migration SLES Linux considerations i5 considerations Upgrading your SLES on iseries to SLES Linux server migration from iseries to eserver i Terms to be familiar with Steps to migrate your Linux server to eserver i5 hardware Migration troubleshooting Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux iseries Access for Linux product overview iseries Access for Linux product features iv Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

7 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388TOC.fm iseries Access for Linux facts sheet iseries Access for Linux requirements Installing iseries Access for Linux ODBC configuration ODBCConfig: GUI method of ODBC configuration Editing odbc.ini: Text mode of ODBC configuration Connecting with DB2 UDB for iseries isql DataManagerII Client server applications written in C PHP for three-tier applications emulator Emulator Languages Starting a 5250 emulator How to use 5250 emulator for HMC console access Related publications IBM Redbooks Other publications Online resources How to get IBM Redbooks Help from IBM Index Contents v

8 6388TOC.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am vi Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

9 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388spec.fm Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A. IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-ibm product, program, or service. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive Armonk, NY U.S.A. The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-ibm Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Information concerning non-ibm products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-ibm products. Questions on the capabilities of non-ibm products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products. This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental. COPYRIGHT LICENSE: This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrates programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM for the purposes of developing, using, marketing, or distributing application programs conforming to IBM's application programming interfaces. Copyright IBM Corp All rights reserved. vii

10 6388spec.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both: Eserver Eserver Redbooks (logo) Trademark Search: Open all files to be trademark searched except this file. Use the Toolkit>Trademark Search and copy/paste the resulting FrameMaker console IBM trademarks to the list above using a CellBody tag. Sort Trademark lists: Sort the lists, if needed, by converting to a table, sorting table cells and converting back to a list. Use the following three steps: 1. Select all marks to be sorted and Table>Convert to Table>Tab_1x1>Convert 2. Select all table cells and Table>Sort>Column 1>Sort 3. Select all table cells, Table>Convert to Paragraphs>Row by Row and delete extra blank lines from list. Mark first use of a trademark: Use the RXFM>Editor tools>trademark-mark-first-occurrence tool. Delete this note box when done. The following terms are trademarks of other companies: Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Intel, Intel Inside (logos), MMX, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. viii Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

11 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388pref.fm Preface This redbook is about Linux implementation on new IBM eserver i5. With brand new technologies of POWER5 and IBM Virtualization Engine, Linux on i5 is even more powerful, scalable, and flexible. We also have new versions of Linux distributions are available for Linux on iseries. They are SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES) 9 and Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) 4. This redbook will make you ready to plan, configure, and install Linux on i5. It discusses the migration issues of Linux from previous iseries systems to i5. It also covers various helpful topics of administrations, operations, and tips and techniques. Discussion of a new product of iseries Access for Linux is also included for the topics of iseries Access for Web, ODBC driver and 5250 emulation features. This redbook is produced through the residency program performed at ITSO Rochester Center. During the residency, we have used SLES 9 for Linux distribution. Therefore, much of the information in this redbook is SLES 9 specific. Although, the majority of its contents are Linux generic and should be relevant on other distribution of Linux such as RHEL 4. The team that wrote this redbook This redbook was produced by a team of specialists from around the world working at the International Technical Support Organization, Rochester Center. Yessong Johng an IBM Certified IT Specialist at the IBM International Technical Support Organization, Rochester Center. He started his IT career at IBM as a S/38 Systems Engineer in 1982 and has been with S/38, AS/400, and now iseries for 20 years. He writes extensively and develops and teaches IBM classes worldwide on the areas of IT Optimization whose topics include Linux, AIX, and Windows implementations on iseries. He is also interested in e-business area especially with WebSphere implementations on iseries. Fredy Cruz is the Independent Software Vendor (ISV) Coordinator at IBM Colombia. He helps developers in infrastructure migrations over software including WebSphere and DB2 on both Linux on iseries and OS/400. He also teaches ISVs and customers about the utilities and technologies related to this task. His major responsibilities are demonstrating new utility implementations on the i5, Linux, AIX and Windows integration on i5, DB2 and WebSphere in i5/os, AIX and Linux, and Lotus in the i5/os environment. Copyright IBM Corp All rights reserved. ix

12 6388pref.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Stacey Johnson is an Advisory IT Specialist with IBM in the USA. She has 10 years of experience on the iseries platform. She started her IBM career 10 years ago in the area of iseries system support. She remains in that area working in the IT Data Center in Rochester, Minnesota. There she supports and manages numerous iseries systems running a multitude of applications (HTTP, Apache, WebSphere, Domino, Linux, OS/400, i5/os, BRMS) for IBM internal customers. She holds a Bachelor's Degree in Computer Science from Winona State University. She can be reached at: [email protected]. Vaclav Matousek is a IT Specialist in Czech Republic. He has over 17 years experience in computing, with eleven years in the AS/400 or iseries area. He is a member of FTSS team in IBM CEMA with focusing on LPAR, Linux and AIX on iseries and i5.he is certified technical specialist on LPAR, Linux and Windows on iseries. He do LPAR and Linux educations and workshops in IBM CEMA countries and Solution Assurance on projects in focused area.you can reach him by at: [email protected]. Vaseem Ansari is Assistant General Manager-Infrastructure Services at Melstar Information Technologies Limited, India. Melstar is an IBM Business Partner since Vaseem joined Melstar in 1994 and has been involved in the areas of technical support services and network integration services. He has 14 years of experience in the design and implementation of multi vendor network solutions. He has extensive experience with Windows and Solaris operating systems and specializes on Linux. He is a Red Hat Certified Engineer (RHCE). He is currently focused on information system security. Vlatko Kosturjak is IT Security Specialist with IBM Global Services Security and Privacy Services at IBM Croatia. In his practice, Vlatko specializes in ethical hacking, IT audit, security policy development according to ISO/IEC standard, consultative services for the design, implementation, and validation of enterprise-wide continuity and recovery programs, and assisting clients with developing and implementing effective security solutions for the protection of their information assets. He has extensive experience in security design for networks and server hardening on various operating systems. Thanks to the following people for their contributions to this project: David Boutcher Pam Morris Jay Bryant Ray Anderson Mike Ranweiler Monza Lui Dharmesh Patel Edith Lueke John Janosik x Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

13 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388pref.fm Mark Vanderwiel Richard Johnston Fant Steele Erwin Earley Craig Johnson IBM Rochester Bob Foster Christine Wang IBM Austin Become a published author Join us for a two- to six-week residency program! Help write an IBM Redbook dealing with specific products or solutions, while getting hands-on experience with leading-edge technologies. You'll team with IBM technical professionals, Business Partners and/or customers. Your efforts will help increase product acceptance and customer satisfaction. As a bonus, you'll develop a network of contacts in IBM development labs, and increase your productivity and marketability. Find out more about the residency program, browse the residency index, and apply online at: ibm.com/redbooks/residencies.html Comments welcome Your comments are important to us! We want our Redbooks to be as helpful as possible. Send us your comments about this or other Redbooks in one of the following ways: Use the online Contact us review redbook form found at: ibm.com/redbooks Send your comments in an to: [email protected] Mail your comments to: IBM Corporation, International Technical Support Organization Dept. JLU Building Highway 52N Rochester, Minnesota Preface xi

14 6388pref.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am xii Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

15 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm 1 Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 This chapter defines terms you need to become familiar with as you partition your eserver i5 system and migrate your Linux server to it. These terms are used throughout this book. Some of the differences between the iseries and the eserver i5 are described in this chapter as well. Also included are some helpful websites. Copyright IBM Corp All rights reserved. 1

16 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 1.1 Concepts and terminology Following are concepts and terms you need to know as you partition your new eserver i5 system and install or migrate your Linux partitions to it eserver i5 The IBM eserver i5 520 and the IBM eserver i5 570 are the industry s first servers based on the POWER5 technology. Along with i5/os V5R3, these systems support the AIX 5L and LINUX operating systems. i5/os This is the newest version of OS/400; may also be referred to as V5R3 on legacy iseries systems. POWER5 POWER5 is IBM s 9th generation of 64-bit POWER processor technology. Although the hardware is based on POWER4, POWER5 is more than an improvement in processor or chip design. Enhancements have been made to improve performance, allow more processors to be used in a system, and improve power efficiency. Some of the new features included with the POWER5 systems include simultaneous multi-threading (SMT), virtualization, and dynamic logical partitioning (DLPAR). AIX 5L can now run on POWER5 systems along with the new versions of Linux on POWER. POWER Hypervisor The POWER Hypervisor is a new level of code that is above the POWER5 technology-based hardware. It is shipped with the eserver i5 system and is part of the firmware. It resides in the flash memory of the service processor (SP) and performs the initialization and configuration of the eserver i5 hardware. It also provides the virtualization support needed to run up to 254 logical partitions concurrently on the eserver i5 system. The POWER Hypervisor performs the logical partitioning and is responsible for assigning resources to the partitions and ensuring the partitions remain isolated from each other. If automatic load balancing and uncapped processors are utilized, the POWER Hypervisor is responsible for assigning the unused processor capacity and making maximum use of the processor. Figure 1-1 Power Hypervisor The POWER Hypervisor allows for multiple operating systems to run on the new eserver i5 hardware. i5/os, Linux, AIX 5L are supported. The layer above the POWER Hypervisor is different for each supported operating system. 2 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

17 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm For i5/os, the layers above the POWER Hypervisor are still in place. SLIC (System Licensed Internal Code) has been changed and is enabled for interfacing with the POWER Hypervisor. For Linux and AIX 5L operating systems, the layers above the POWER Hypervisor are similar but their content is characteristic for the operating system. These layers include system firmware and Run-Time Abstraction Services (RTAS). System firmware System firmware consists of Low Level Firmware and Open Firmware (OF). Low Level Firmware performs the server unique input/output configurations. Open Firmware contains the boot time drivers, the boot manager, and the device drivers required to initialize the PCI adapters and attached devices. RTAS - Run-Time Abstraction Services This consists of the code that supplies platform dependent accesses and can be called from the operating system. System management services System management services (SMS) is the user interface to Open Firmware. SMS is available in all non-i5/os or non-os/400 partitions. The SMS menus are displayed on the partition console. Service processor The service processor (SP) is a separate processor within the POWER5 system. It interacts with the hardware management console (HMC) via ethernet and with the user via the front panel of the system. It is active as long as the system is plugged in, regardless of the on/off status of the system. Advanced system management Advanced system management (ASM) is a web interface to the service processor (SP). This can be used to configure systems without HMCs. (Note that an HMC is required for any partitioning.) ASM can also be used to configure the TCP/IP address of the HMC and can perform a number of service functions such as reading service processor error logs, reading vital product data, setting up the service processor and controlling the system power. Figure 1-2 ASM screen Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 3

18 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Automatic processor movement The eserver i5 and the POWER Hypervisor can now move processor resources based on the workload in the logical partitions. Resources can be removed from non-busy logical partitions and added to busy logical partitions automatically Hardware management console The hardware management console (HMC) is used to manage eserver i5 hardware, logical partitions and Capacity on Demand. It is a pre-installed Linux-based workstation with an ethernet connection and is available as a stand-alone desktop system or can be rack-mounted in the eserver i5. It is a closed system meaning no other software can be installed on it. This type of console is required if doing any partitioning of the new eserver i5 hardware and if using Capacity on Demand on the eserver i5. It is required for performing any dynamic LPAR actions and can be used to activate any logical partitions that are in a powered off status. One HMC can support multiple eserver i5 systems. There is no longer a primary partition on the eserver i5. Some of the function done by the primary partition is now done with the HMC. The HMC replaces the functions performed in service tools regarding partitions and also replaces the functions in DST for enabling Capacity Upgrade on Demand (CUoD). The HMC screen has two panes as seen in Figure 1-3. A Navigation Area is on the left side and this lists the functions that can be done from the HMC. The right pane, Contents Area, will change as you make selections on the left. The example below shows the eserver i5 that the HMC manages. Figure 1-3 HMC screen HMC scheduler Memory and processor resource movements can now be done using the HMC scheduler. On the HMC, you go into HMC Management, HMC Configuration, Scheduled Operations, Select a Partition, and then use Dynamic Reconfiguration Option. 4 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

19 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm Figure 1-4 HMC Scheduler Managed system The managed system is the eserver i5 physical hardware that the HMC has been configured to maintain. Managed system properties From the HMC, you can see where your system resources have been assigned. On your HMC screen, select Server and Partition Server Management. The left pane of your HMC will now show the managed systems. Below each managed system is the partitions and system profiles. Figure 1-3 shows our HMC with the 520i5 as the managed system. Right click on the managed system and then select Properties. A Managed System 520i5 Property Dialog screen is displayed as seen in Figure 1-5. This first screen will give you some general information regarding your eserver i5. The tabs at the top will give you more detailed information and show you where your resources have been assigned. Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 5

20 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 1-5 Managed system properties - general information Figure 1-6 shows the processor information for the managed system and the processor usage by each logical partition. 6 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

21 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm Figure 1-6 Managed system properties - processor information Figure 1-7 lists the physical I/O resources for the managed system. Details on the I/O adapters and the logical partitions they are assigned to are displayed here. Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 7

22 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 1-7 Managed system properties - I/O information Figure 1-8 shows the details of the managed system s memory and the memory usage by logical partition. 8 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

23 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm Figure 1-8 Managed system properties - memory information Web-based System Manager Web-based System Manager (WebSM) is a java-based application that allows you to do HMC functions remotely from another PC. This tool is downloaded to the PC from the HMC via a web interface: Logical partitions By using logical partitioning (LPAR), a single physical system can be divided into multiple logical partitions each running their own operating system image. LPAR provides a framework for systems consolidation on i5 servers. Partition ID The partition ID is a whole number used to identify logical partitions. Partition profile A partition profile specifies the resources and settings for a logical partition. This includes the memory, processor and I/O allocations. To activate a logical partition, one of the partition profiles for that logical partition must be activated. You may have multiple partition profiles with different resource specifications for a single logical partition based on the needs/requirements of that logical partition. Note, however, that Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 9

24 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am only one partition profile can be active at a time. Activating a different partition profile requires the logical partition to be shutdown. If you have multiple partition profiles, any one of them can be designated as the default partition profile. The HMC will activate the default profile unless you specify a different partition profile to be activated. It is possible that a partition profile will not activate due to an overcommitment of resources on the system. The HMC shows all of the resources available on the system but does not verify if these resources are already in use by an activated partition profile. As a partition profile is activated, the system attempts to allocate the resources specified. If the resources are already in use, the partition profile will not activate. Minimum, desired, maximum values As you setup the partition profile, you will be asked to input the minimum, desired, and maximum values for memory and processor units. If your system resources are not overcommitted, the logical partition will get the desired values. However, if resources are overcommitted, the logical partition will be given a value between the minimum and desired values. If the minimum value cannot be met, the partition profile will not activate, meaning you cannot start the particular server, i.e. operating system, of that partition. The maximum indicates the maximum value that may be dynamically set. Full system partition profile A full system partition profile is a partition profile that has been setup to use all the resources of the system including memory, processors, I/O, disks. A full system partition profile can be used for i5/os only. When this partition profile is activated, all system resources are committed to the associated logical partition. No other partition profiles and logical partitions will be allowed to be activated as long as this full partition profile and associated logical partition are active. Conversely, a full system partition profile cannot be activated when other partition profiles and logical partitions are already active. If additional hardware resources are added to the system and then a full system partition profile is activated, the associated logical partition automatically recognizes and uses the new hardware. A note of warning: Because all the disks are allocated to this full system partition profile, the logical partition may overwrite the disk resources on the system. System profile A system profile is an ordered list of partition profiles on the managed system. When a system profile is activated, the managed systems will attempt to activate the partition profiles in the order they are listed in the system profile. A system profile is helpful when changing the managed system from one set of logical partitions to another. It is possible to create a system profile that contains a partition profile with overcommitted resources. The HMC can be used to validate the system profile against currently available resources or against the total system resources. This validation will ensure your I/O devices and processing resources are not overcommitted. However, memory requirements are only estimated. It is possible for a system profile to pass the validation test, but not have enough memory to be activated. 10 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

25 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm Service partition The HMC reports hardware errors to IBM. If the HMC is unavailable, then a service partition can report errors. This partition has the authority needed to update the system and other policy parameters without having to power off the eserver i5. On eserver i5 systems, only an i5/os logical partition can act as the service partition. This service partition typically has a physical connection to a network attached to the HMC and virtual connections to the other logical partitions on the eserver i5. This allows the service partition to receive server errors from the other logical partitions and report the server errors to IBM Processor concepts There are varying options for processor assignments for logical partitions such as dedicated whole processors, shared processors, or fractions of processors. New in eserver i5 is the concept of capped or uncapped partitions. Results of your capacity planning and your system hardware configuration will help you determine your optimal processor assignments for each of your logical partitions. One logical partition may need dedicated processors while another logical partition can use the shared processing pool. Dedicated processors When a system is logically partitioned using dedicated processors, each processor in its entirety is assigned to a partition. In this case, you would only be allowed two partitions at most with a two-processor system, for example. Each partition would then have only one processor assigned to it. Dedicated processors may get better performance than shared processors, but shared processors are more flexible and allow better use of the processors for multiple partitions. Shared processors (micro-partitioning) Shared processors allow you to assign fractions of a processor to a logical partition and are held in the shared processing pool. This allows multiple logical partitions to share a processor. Virtual processors A virtual processor represents a single physical processor to the operating system of the logical partition. This is a whole number of concurrent operations that the operating system can use. Selecting the optimal number of virtual processors depends on the workload of the partition. One partition may benefit from greater concurrent operations while another partition may benefit from greater power. The default setting for virtual processors is based on the number of processing units specified for a logical partition. The number of processing units is rounded up to the next whole number to get the minimum number of virtual processors. If you have 1.5 processing units, 2 virtual processors will be assigned by default. You may want to specify a greater number of virtual processors so that you do not limit the processing capacity of an uncapped partition. Shared processor pool The shared processor pool is a group of physical processors that provide processing power to multiple logical partitions. With this shared pool, you can assign fractions of processors (or shared processor units) to logical partitions. There is only one shared processor pool for the system. When shared processors are used, a physical processor may be moved from one logical partition to another logical partition many times a second. This allows for flexible use of the Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 11

26 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am processor and maximizes processing power across the logical partitions. However, there is a performance impact due to the cost of switching from one logical partition to another. In addition, memory caches are reloaded when processors are switched between logical partitions. Shared processor units Shared processor units are a unit of measure for shared processing power across one or more virtual processors. One shared processing unit on one virtual processor accomplishes approximately the same work as one dedicated processor. Partitions that use shared processors are assigned these shared processor units. The minimum units that can be assigned to a partition is 0.10 processor units per virtual processor. If 2 virtual processors are assigned to the logical partition, then 0.20 processor units must be assigned as a minimum. Capped/uncapped logical partitions A capped partition is limited to using the number of shared processor units that it has been assigned. It is never allowed to exceed that processing capacity. This allows for very predictable performance and should be used when doing any performance benchmarks. Uncapped partitions are a new feature with the eserver i5 hardware. While an uncapped partition is guaranteed the number of shared processor units it has been assigned, it is now allowed to automatically consume any unused processor capacity in the shared pool and in the system pool when dedicated processors are not being used by other logical partitions. An uncapped logical partition can consume unused processor capacity up to its maximum virtual processor setting. Uncapped partitions are given a relative weight to other uncapped partitions. This weight is a value from 0 to 255 with 255 being the highest weight; the default weight is 128. The eserver i5 system and the POWER hypervisor will move processor resources to other partitions based on the activity in the partitions and the relative weight given to those partitions. Let me illustrate this point by taking an example: You have a multiple partitioned system. Partitions 1, 2, and 3 are uncapped. Partition 1 has two processing units assigned to it; it is using 50% of its allocated processing resource. Partition 3 has one processing unit assigned to it, but it is running at 100% utilization and is in need of more processing resource. Since partition 3 is uncapped and has two virtual processors, the unused processor units in Partition 1 can be used in Partition 3 thus increasing its processor capacity and allowing it to complete its workload. If Partition 2 required additional resources at the same time, unused processing capacity could be distributed to both partitions. The distribution would be determined by the uncapped weight of each of the partitions. If Partition 2 had a weight of 100 and Partition 3 had a weight of 200, Partition 3 would get twice the unused processing capacity as Partition 2. Should Partition 1 s workload increase, it can acquire back its resources. Note: CUoD processors that have not yet been activated cannot be used by uncapped logical partitions. 12 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

27 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm I/O pools An I/O pool is a group of I/O adapters that form an I/O failover pool also referred to as switchable independent disk pool or switchable independent auxiliary storage pool (ASP). I/O adapters within the I/O pool can be used by only one logical partition at a time. However, once the current owning logical partition powers off the I/O adapters in the pool, another logical partition in the group can then take them over. Intervention by the HMC is not required to switch an I/O failover pool from a failed server to a backup server. I/O adapters do not belong to any I/O pool by default. Each I/O adapter can be assigned to a single I/O pool. I/O pools are used to share optional I/O adapters (such as a SCSI tape drive or optical device) among many logical partitions. They are also used to form failover pools that can be switched from a failed server to a backup server within the same cluster. As you are assigning I/O adapters to a partition profile, you can assign each adapter to a single I/O pool. The HMC automatically associates the partition profile with the I/O pools that these adapters have been assigned to. A partition profile can be associated with more than one I/O pool. When you activate a partition profile, the logical partition is given access to the I/O pools associated with the partition profile. This allows the logical partition to take over and use the I/O adapters in that pool. Example: You have two separate logical partitions. Three I/O adapters are assigned as required to the default partition profile for each logical partition. These same three I/O adapters are assigned to I/O pool 2. When the default partition profile for the first logical partition is activated, this logical partition starts and uses the three I/O adapters and is given access to I/O pool 2. When the default partition profile for the second logical partition is activated, this logical partition does not get to use the three I/O adapters since the first logical partition has them allocated. The second partition is still given access to I/O pool 2 however. When the first logical partition powers off the I/O adapters, the second logical partition can then take them over Virtualization and the virtualization engine Virtualization enables resource sharing in an integrated environment on a single eserver i5. Processors, network adapters, storage adapters are among the hardware resources that can be shared among logical partitions. Virtualization is implemented in the firmware and allows the resource to appear similar to a physical adapter attached to the logical partition. This ability to share hardware allows multiple operating systems to run on a single physical system. The Virtualization Engine (VE) is a combination of software and hardware technologies that enables computer systems to clone themselves. One server can act like ten and multiply the performance capabilities of the single server. Logical partitioning, virtual storage and virtual ethernet are all components of the virtualization engine Virtualization engine (VE) platform technologies These highly integrated products allow you to streamline the management of heterogeneous partitions or servers. These can be used to simplify your IT infrastructure. Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 13

28 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am IBM eserver On/Off Capacity on Demand Capacity on Demand is a fast, non-disruptive method for activating extra processor capacity already built into select eserver i5 models. These select models ship with a number of processors and memory units activated. There is additional processors and memory units in these select models that is unavailable until activated. These additional processor and memory units can be activated temporarily, permanently or for a free-trial period. Once activated (either temporarily or permanently), processors can be dynamically allocated to logical partitions as workload demands. Dynamic logical partitioning Dynamic Logical Partitioning (DLPAR) is designed to pool resources and optimize their use across logical partitions running multiple operating systems and application environments. To make the best use of system resources, it is frequently necessary to move resources between logical partitions while the eserver i5 system is running and the logical partitions are active. DLPAR refers to the functions that moves these resources (processors, memory, I/O devices) between logical partitions while they are active. Simultaneous multi-threading Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) allows a single processor to have two sets of registers and two threads of execution and swap between them. When one thread stalls, the other thread can take over. This switch occurs quickly since the processor has two sets of registers. This concurrent execution of multiple instruction streams optimizes processor utilization. The i5 servers fully automate SMT without requiring any application modifications or tuning. Depending on the workload, SMT may make the system more efficient. Performance increases have been seen while utilizing SMT function. Due to SMT, Linux will think it has twice the number of processors than it is configured for. For example, if the Linux partition is assigned two processors, four processors will show in the /proc/cpuinfo. Virtual I/O Virtual I/O enables sharing of physical resources among partitions. These resources include storage, adapters and devices. Virtual I/O allows the creation of new logical partitions without requiring the addition of physical I/O adapters to the system. Multiple logical partitions can share the same physical I/O resources and each logical partition can simultaneously use both virtual and physical I/O devices. With virtual I/O, Linux can leverage the performance, availability and manageability of the eserver i5 architecture. Virtual ethernet adapters Virtual ethernet adapters are created using the HMC. To the operating system, this virtual ethernet adapters appears as a real ethernet adapter. Virtual ethernet provides the same function as using a 1 GB ethernet adapter without requiring additional hardware. It can be used by logical partitions to establish high speed connections to other logical partitions on the same iseries or eserver i5 system. These virtual ethernet segments can be created/removed dynamically and can be restricted for security or traffic requirements. When a virtual ethernet port is configured, the i5/os system creates a virtual ethernet communications port, CMNxx, with a resource type of 268C. This resource is used to configure the ethernet line descriptions and set up the virtual LAN. 14 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

29 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm Up to 4094 virtual LANs can be created using virtual ethernet adapters. Each LAN is identified by a virtual LAN ID number. To communicate with each other, ethernet adapters must be assigned the same LAN ID number. Benefits of virtual ethernet Reliability: Unlike the physical ethernet adapter and its link which exists externally to the i5 system, virtual ethernet exists internally to the system. It runs over system memory bus. Thus, as far as the i5 server system is up and running, virtual ethernet always exists providing the highest level of reliability. Security: For the same reason of internal existence to the system, the needs of securing externally existing link are gone. Virtual ethernet is most secured communication link possible. Fast: Virtual ethernet emulates a 1Gb ethernet connection and provides a fast and convenient communication method between partitions. Economical: Logical partitions can be added and can communicate with external LAN with no extra networking hardware required. Flexible: Distinctive connections can be configured to enable selective communications paths between logical partitions. Logical partitions implement both virtual ethernet and a physical LAN connection. Versatile: The i5/os and Linux can communicate with each other via TCP/IP over the virtual ethernet ports. Reduced congestion: Using virtual ethernet for communication between logical partitions reduces traffic on the external LAN. This will help prevent degradation of service for other external LAN users. Connecting virtual ethernet and external LAN There are three methods for connecting the virtual ethernet and external LAN. Refer to the IBM Information Center for more details on the implementation of these methods. Proxy ARP: This is a built-in function of TCP/IP and uses transparent subnetting to associate a logical partition s virtual interface with an external interface. This method is recommended if you have the necessary IP addresses available. Network address translation (NAT): This method uses i5/os packet filtering to route traffic between a logical partition and the external LAN. TCP/IP routing: This is used to route traffic to the virtual ethernet LANs in the same way you would define routing to any LAN. If using this method, updating routing information throughout the network will be required. Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 15

30 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Trunk adapter Each virtual LAN can have only one trunk adapter. This trunk adapter links the LAN to the external network. When data transmission on the virtual LAN is addressed to an adapter that does not exist on that virtual LAN, the transmission is sent to the trunk adapter which forwards it to the external network. Using the trunk adapter along with Layer 2 Bridging actually provides the easiest and most flexible method for connecting VLANs to the external network. For this to work however, the operating system of the logical partition must be configured to forward information to the external network. Note that not all operating systems support this method of connecting virtual LANs to external networks. Consult the documentation for the operating system to determine if it supports trunk adapters. IEEE Q compatible adapter IEEE Q is a networks standard. This is an option as you create your virtual ethernet LAN and adapters. It allows you to add your virtual ethernet adapter to multiple virtual LANs per the standard. Note that not all operating systems support this network standard. If this is not supported by your operating system, then your virtual ethernet can only connect to one port virtual LAN ID. Consult the documentation for the operating system to determine if it supports the IEEE Q network standard. Virtual SCSI adapters Virtual SCSI adapters are created using the HMC and provide access to disk for the Linux server. To the operating system, they appear as any other SCSI adapter. A virtual SCSI client adapter connects to a virtual SCSI server adapter in an i5/os logical partition. This virtual SCSI server adapter is then associated with the NWSD and NWSSTG objects in the i5/os logical partition. NWSD is network server description. This is an i5/os configuration object. If using virtual disk, this NWSD is used to IPL the logical partition, boot Linux, and must be active for the server to function. In an environment using native disk (i.e. direct I/O), the NWSD is needed to load the kernel for the initial installation of Linux. NWSSTG is network server storage space. The Create Network Server Storage Space (CRTNWSSTG) command creates a storage space to be used by the network server; the network server being the Linux logical partition. The Linux installation program reformats this disk for use by the Linux server. Virtual serial adapters Virtual serial I/O provides the console function for the Linux server. Virtual CD A virtual CD it may be used for the installation of Linux. By default, a Linux logical partition can see all the CD drives on the host logical partition. Virtual tape A virtual tape provides access to the i5/os tape drives for the Linux logical partition. By default, a Linux logical partition can see all the tape drives attached to the host logical partition Virtualization engine platform services With support from the POWER Hypervisor, these platform services compliment the platform technologies to help simplify your IT infrastructure. 16 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

31 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm IBM Director Multiplatform IBM Director Multiplatform provides a common Web-based console for systems management and monitoring of multiple operating environments. Operating systems include i5/os, AIX 5L, Linux and Windows. Director Multiplatform ships with all copies of i5/os. IBM Grid Toolbox V3 for Multiplatforms IBM Grid Toolbox V3 for Multiplatforms helps build more secure, robust infrastructures using open standards by connecting systems and resources through a single management interface. Systems provisioning Systems provisioning features enable businesses to deploy and re-purpose virtualized IT resources to meet changing business needs. This is designed to maximize resource utilization and reduce data center complexity. IBM Enterprise Workload Manager (EWLM) EWLM is designed to monitor computing resources, response times and transaction flows to help businesses improve service level management and capacity planning. It gives you a graphical view of the performance of your enterprise applications. Self-managing capabilities can help isolate problems and optimize workload management Virtual I/O versus direct I/O Linux on eserver i5 supports virtual I/O and direct I/O. These implementations of Linux are often referred to as hosted and non-hosted respectively. Figure 1-9 Virtual I/O vs direct I/O Virtual I/O (hosted Linux server) With virtual I/O, the resources are owned and managed by the i5/os logical partition that is hosting the Linux logical partition. The i5/os shares these resources (disk, tape, CD-ROM, etc.) with the hosted Linux server. The i5/os provides the DASD protection and some backup/restore facilities for the Linux environment. Virtual ethernet provides 1Gb communications paths between logical partitions without requiring additional hardware resources. Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 17

32 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Linux is started from the hosting i5/os logical partition by varying on the network server description (NWSD). This Linux server can only be active when the i5/os hosting logical partition is active. If the i5/os hosting logical partition is in restricted state, then the NWSDs are in a varied off state. Direct I/O (non-hosted Linux server) With direct I/O, the resources are owned by and are under the control of Linux. It does not depend on i5/os for any of its resources; consequently, i5/os cannot use these resources since they are allocated to the Linux server. For directly attached hardware, all failure and diagnostic messages are displayed within the Linux server. Linux can take advantage of both virtual and direct I/O resources at the same time Virtual I/O server The virtual I/O server is specific to the eserver p5 systems. It resides in a POWER5 logical partition and provides the virtual SCSI server and shared ethernet adapter virtual I/O function to client logical partitions (Linux or AIX). It is not intended to run applications or for general use. This product is not supported on i5. Equivalent functions are integrated in i5/os itself. Therefore, i5/os is the only partition which can play a role of the server partition on the eserver i5 systems LPAR Validation Tool This LPAR Validation Tool (LVT) will help you design and validate i5/8xx/270 systems for partitioning. This tool should be used before your system is ordered. It is a PC-based tool intended to be run as a stand-alone Java application. The tool can be downloaded from: Download the LVT Base tool first and then download the LVT Updates Brief intro to Linux and Linux on i5 Linux was first developed by Linus Torvalds in Finland As time has passed, others have added packages to the original kernel and began to distribute them. Hence the concept of distributions was created. There are numerous distributions of all types now available from companies or individuals. Linux s functionality, adaptability and robustness has made it an alternative for Unix and Microsoft operating systems. It is being adopted world-wide as a server platform and its home and office desktop use is also on the rise. Linux has an official mascot, Tux the penguin. He was selected by Linus Torvalds to represent the image he associates with the operating system. Linux on eserver i5 Supported distributions of Linux for the eserver i5 system include SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server (SLES) 9 SP1 and RedHat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) 4. The eserver i5 offers Linux integration and consolidation via logical partitioning and resource virtualization. The eserver i5 can help reduce costs by server consolidation and improve investments with new applications. 18 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

33 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm The eserver i5 can consolidate several servers with Linux partitions. It can also share resources among i5/os and Linux partitions. Logical partitioning supports sharing and dynamically moving processor resources thus maximizing processor utilization. SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 9 SP1 for POWER (SLES 9) The first distribution of SUSE Linux began in The company was acquired by Novell in SLES 9 is a secure, reliable platform for open-source computing supporting a range of hardware platforms and software packages. It also provides open APIs and other development tools to help simplify Linux integration and customization. SLES 9 includes the Linux kernel version 2.6, an improvement over earlier systems in terms of scale, speed and power. Many of the improvements in SLES 9 are a direct result of the new kernel. RedHat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 4 RedHat is a well-known Linux and open-source provider. It was founded in RedHat Enterprise Linux runs on multiple architectures and is certified by enterprise software and hardware vendors. RedHat is based on the 2.6 kernel. Linux utilities The following are some of the most common software packages that are used to connect to and manage your Linux servers. YaST YaST stands for yet another system tool. It is used to configure and manage your Linux server. YaST can be started by typing: yast as system administrator (root) on the Linux command line. YaST Control Center screen shows up as illustarted in Figure Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 19

34 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 1-10 YaST Control Center This tool is available on the SUSE Linux distributions. Red Hat Setup Setup is Red Hat implementation of Linux configuration tool. It is used to configure and manage your Linux server. Setup can be started by typing: setup as system administrator (root) on the Linux command line. Figure 1-11 Red Hat Setup 20 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

35 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm This tool is available on the Red Hat Linux distributions. PuTTY PuTTY is a free Telnet and SSH client for Win32 and Unix platforms. The PuTTY version used in this book is version Figure 1-12 Putty PuTTY can be downloaded from: VNC Virtual Network Computing (VNC) is free software which allows you to view and interact with another computer which may or may not have the same operating system. Figure 1-13 VNC VNC can be downloaded from: Webmin Webmin is a web-based interface for system administration of Unix systems. This is an open-source tool that runs on a variety of Linux distributions including SUSE and RedHat and a variety of hardware platforms. With Webmin, you access your Linux server using a web browser with Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 21

36 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 1-14 Webmin Webmin can be downloaded from: Refer to Section 5.3, Linux administration using Webmin on page 196 for more details regarding the use of Webmin for Linux administration. WinSCP WinSCP is an open source SFTP and SCP client for Windows using SSH to connect to Unix machines. 22 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

37 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm Figure 1-15 WinSCP Preferences WinSCP can be downloaded from: Differences between legacy iseries and eserver i5 The following tables shows some of the significant differences between the iseries and eserver i5 systems. Table 1-1 Differences at a glance Documentation iseries IBM eserver iseries Information Center eserver i5 IBM eserver Hardware Information Center and IBM eserver iseries Information Center Architecture POWER4 POWER5 Max # partitions Max partitions per processor Processor movement Static Dynamic movement of processor units Static Dynamic movement of processor units and number of processors Automatic Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 23

38 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am iseries eserver i5 Memory movement Static Dynamic Assigned in 1 MB increments Static Dynamic Assigned in 16 MB increments Max # of virtual ethernets Partition management Primary partition HMC Types of partitions Primary Secondary LPAR user interface iseries Navigator Dedicated Service Tools (DST) or System Service Tools (SST) LPAR API Operating systems V5R3 OS/400 Linux No primary or secondary i5/os service partition Partition profiles System profiles HMC required for partitioning LPAR DST/SST not available HMC remote command i5/os Linux AIX 5L Sharing I/O with other operating systems Linux Linux AIX 5L Scheduling of I/O resources, CPU and memory LPAR toolkit iseries Navigator Memory and CPU movement through HMC Partial CPU and I/O movement planned for future release I/O allocations Allocated at bus-level or IOP-level IOP may be switched among partitions dynamically Bus ownership or bus changes occur dynamically IOP may be switched among logical partitions I/O resources allocated at slot level Bus ownership cannot be configured. All buses are effectively shared Uncapped processor partitioning no yes LPAR configuration data Contained in load source Contained in service processor (SP) and HMC 24 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

39 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm iseries eserver i5 Console support iseries Operations Console - LAN or direct attach Twinax console HMC iseries Operations Console - LAN or direct attach Twinax console Fixes (PTFS) for Hypervisor Primary partition HMC Service partition Main storage dumps System level dump Logical partition dumps Service processor dumps Platform system dumps Logical partition dumps Note: At the time of writing this redbook the dynamic memory movement does not work with the current version of Linux eserver i5 editions This section discusses the edition offerings which are unique to i5 servers. Standard edition The i5 standard edition includes: i5/os WebSphere Express Multiple, concurrent OS support including i5/os, Linux, Windows, and AIX 5L Dynamic logical partitioning Capacity on Demand with selected models Support for WebFaced 5250 OLTP applications Enterprise edition The i5 enterprise edition includes the i5 Standard edition offerings plus: Support for WebFaced and non-webfaced 5250 OLTP applications e-business software including WebSphere Portal Express Plus Systems management software including Backup Recovery and Media Services (BRMS) with selected models One additional processor activation for Linux or AIX 5L with selected models Integrated xseries Server with selected models Service vouchers Education vouchers with selected models Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 25

40 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Solution edition This edition provides an integrated offering including IBM middleware to meet the needs of ISVs. With the offerings from the ISVs, this edition is an exceptional value for clients wishing to update their applications and server platforms. This edition includes: One i5/os license Activation of one additional processor Integrated xseries adapter Service voucher for use on either Linux, Windows Integration, AIX 5L (including one AIX 5L license), or WebSphere Requires purchase of solutions from Independent Software Venders (ISVs) Domino edition This edition is targeted for clients who want an integrated offering to run Domino and collaborative applications. This edition includes: Two i5/os licenses Options for migration from Microsoft Exchange Servers Options for Domino consolidation eserver i5 model 520 editions All eserver i5 520 Editions include licensing for i5/os and support 5250 OLTP applications, Web modernization and the ability to run multiple operating environments. They also offer support for dynamic logical partitioning (LPAR). However, each offers a different level of capacity, power and functionality. Express edition Designed for small to medium-sized businesses, the 520 Express Edition runs a broad range of applications. It can consolidate Windows and UNIX servers providing the capability to run your business and not a server farm. Supports i5/os, Linux, Windows Server, AIX 5L. Goes up 32GB on memory and 19TB on disk. The processor performance goes from 500 to 1000 CPW. Standard and Enterprise edition Supports i5/os, Linux, Windows Server, AIX 5L. Goes up 32GB on memory and 19TB on disk. The processor performance goes from 500 to 6000 CPW. Note: The main differences between Standard and Enterprise edition are explained in Section 1.2.1, eserver i5 editions on page eserver i5 model 550 editions Designed for the unique infrastructure requirements of medium-sized businesses, the model 550 is ideal for server consolidation and IT infrastructure simplification. It comes in Solution, Domino, Standard and Enterprise edition. Supports i5/os, Linux, Windows Server, AIX 5L. Goes up 64GB on memory and 38TB on disk. The processor performance goes from 3300 to CPW. 26 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

41 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm eserver i5 model 570 editions Ideal for growing medium to large enterprises, the model 570 offers multiplatform management and maximum flexibility for customer requiring up to 16-way symmetrical multiprocessing capability. It comes in Standard and Enterprise edition. Supports i5/os, Linux, Windows Server, AIX 5L. Goes up 512GB on memory and 96TB on disk. The processor performance goes from 3300 to CPW eserver i5 model 595 editions Designed for medium to large enterprises, the model 595 is the largest server in the eserver iseries family. It offers multiplatform management and maximum flexibility for customers requiring up to 64-way symmetrical multiprocessing capability. Comes in Standard and Enterprise edition. Supports i5/os, Linux, Windows Server, AIX 5L. Goes up 2TB on memory and 190TB on disk. The processor performance goes from to CPW Linux enhancements on eserver i5 The following table shows the enhancements for Linux on the eserver i5 hardware. Table 1-2 Linux on i5 Function Linux on iseries Linux on eserver i5 Supported Linux version SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 8 (SLES8) RedHat Enterprise Linux 3 SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 for POWER (SLES 9) RedHat Enterprise Linux AS for POWER Version 3 RedHat Enterprise Linux 4 Max number of partitions Partition management Maximum number of partitions supported depends on the number or processors in the iseries server model Maximum number of logical partitions supported equals ten times the number of processors in the eserver i5 model Requires the installation from DRM (DLPAR Resource Manager) of service tools within the partition ( s.ibm.com/server/lopdiags) Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 27

42 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Function Linux on iseries Linux on eserver i5 Processors Cannot be changed dynamically Can be shared among multiple partitions Can be changed without restarting the logical partition with Linux distributions running the 2.6 kernel and using DRM Can be shared among multiple partitions Sharing mode of capped and uncapped Power-off partition using dedicated processors will have its processors available to shared processing pool Max size of a single virtual storage space Max total virtual storage per Linux partition 64 GB 1 TB 2 TBs 64 TBs More i5 enhancements iseries Navigator iseries Navigator has been enhanced to support server and storage management for Linux logical partitions. An administration can start and stop Linux logical partitions in the same interlace they use to manage Integrated xseries Servers. In addition, iseries Navigator supports the creation of virtual storage spaces that can be linked/unlinked from Linux NWSDs. BRMS Support has been added to BRMS to shut down hosted logical partitions before a backup is done and to restart the logical partitions after the backup completes. 1.3 Where to go for more information Following are some web sites that have useful information and may be helpful to you as you migrate your Linux server to the eserver i5. iseries Information Center V5R3 eserver i5 hardware iseries recommended reading IBM eserver i5 and iseries System Handbook: IBM i5/os Version 5 Release 3 IBM eserver i5, iseries, and AS/400e System builder i5/os Version 5 Release 3 28 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

43 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chint.fm Linux-related information Linux on iseries Linux on POWER applications Linux Online SUSE Novell on Linux RedHat Linux Education and general information Resource Link Redbooks IBM Midrange Servers - eserver i5 and iseries iseries.myseries Chapter 1. Introduction to Linux on i5 29

44 6388chint.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 30 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

45 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chplg.fm 2 Chapter 2. Linux partition planning guide This chapter provides the information to help you in planning for the Linux partition setup and installation. The information includes: Hardware requirements for Linux partition System sizing for Linux partition Validating the system configuration plan using LPAR Validation Tool Copyright IBM Corp All rights reserved. 31

46 6388chplg.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 2.1 Hardware requirements for Linux logical partition This section provides the information about the minimum hardware requirements as well as supported devices for Linux partition on eserver i Minimum configuration requirements The following requirements apply for eserver i5. For hardware requirements for previous releases refer to the chapter 2 of Linux on the IBM ~ iseries Server: An Implementation Guide, SG Each Linux partition requires the following minimum hardware resources: Note: This configuration can vary depending of the Linux distribution and version that you want to install. Refer to a specific Linux distribution s guideline for the actual values. Processor unit A whole processor if you configure the partition with dedicated option 0.1 processing unit if you configure the partition with shared option Memory 256 MB of memory Disk storage One virtual storage adapter (vscsi) for virtual I/O One physical IOA for native I/O Approximately 1 GB of disk storage Network interface One virtual ethernet adapter for virtual I/O One physical NIC (Network Interface Card) for native I/O or hybrid scenario Note: In addition to these minimum hardware requirements, you also need to apply all critical fixes and updates for HMC, firmware and i5/os. At the time of writing this redbook, we needed MF33433 and MF33501 on i5/os side to enable the use of virtual resources Communication options Linux on an eserver i5 can establish a TCP/IP connection through either a directly attached network adapter or through a virtual ethernet adapter. Directly attached network adapters A Linux partition can own its physical ethernet adapters. If you have multiple ethernet adapters you might consider to dedicate one or more to the Linux partition. A dedicated adapter eliminates the extra step involved in using the virtual ethernet to communicate with the network as routing methods. Even you can limit the traffic between one server with others. Note: To see the available network adapters go to Section 2.1.3, Supported hardware resources on page Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

47 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chplg.fm A very popular scenario is what we call a hybrid scenario: You have all I/O devices served by the server i5/os partition (virtual I/O) except network connections (direct I/O for network adapters). You can easily set up a firewall or even a demilitarized zone (DMZ) scenario that way. Virtual network adapters Virtual ethernet provides the same function as using a 1 GB ethernet adapter. i5/os and Linux partitions on an eserver i5 can communicate using TCP/IP over the virtual ethernet communication ports. Virtual ethernet provides a very high speed, secure mechanism for communication among partitions on a single physical system. Up to 4,094 separate virtual ethernets can be defined. Each partition can have up to 65,534 virtual ethernet adapters connected to the virtual switch. The enablement and setup of a virtual ethernet does not require any special hardware or software. After a specific virtual ethernet is enabled for a partition, a network device named ethxx is created in the partition where XX can be from 01 to 99. The user can then set up TCP/IP configuration appropriately to communicate with other partitions using the command ifconfig or any wizard that comes with the Linux operating system Supported hardware resources This section lists the devices and adapters supported at the time of writing of this redbook. For up to date information, refer to IBM eserver Hardware Information Center at: Virtual devices Linux on eserver i5 supports virtual devices as illustrated in Table 2-1. Table 2-1 Virtual devices Device Linux driver In Linux work as In i5/os work as Virtual console hvc_console server client Virtual tape st & ibmvscsic client server Virtual CD sr & ibmvscsic client server Virtual disk unit sd & ibmvscsic client server Virtual SCSI ibmvscsic client server Virtual serial is applicable using hvcs driver client client Virtual ethernet ibmveth N/A * N/A * Note * : Virtual ethernet works as peer-to-peer communication. Client server Network adapters Table 2-2 lists the network adapters supported on Linux on i5 for native I/O, or directly attached option. Chapter 2. Linux partition planning guide 33

48 6388chplg.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Table 2-2 Network adapters supported for native I/O Linux partition Description Linux Device Driver Linux Feature Number i5/os Feature Number PCI-X 1Gb ethernet-sx Fiber PCI-X 10/100/1G Base-TX ethernet PCI-X 10/100/1G 2-port Base-TX ethernet PCI-X 1Gb 2-port ethernet-sx Fiber e e e e PCI 100Mb TokenRing olympic PCI 1Gb ethernet acenic PCI 1Gb ethernet UTP acenic PCI 10/100Mb ethernet pcnet Note: Token ring is not supported for netboot installs. Storage adapters Table 2-3 lists the storage adapters supported on Linux on i5 for native I/O, or directly attached. Table 2-3 Storage adapters supported for native I/O Linux partition Description Linux Device Driver Linux Feature Number i5/os Feature Number PCI-X Dual Channel Ultra320 SCSI RAID and PCI-X Dual Channel Ultra320 SCSI RAID Blind Swap 32MB Planar Dual Channel SCSI RAID Enablement PCI-X Dual Channel Ultra320 SCSI Blind Swap and PCI-X Dual Channel Ultra320 SCSI PCI Bus 2Gb Fibre Channel for 64-bit PCI-X 2Gb Fibre Channel PCI Fibre Channel Disk Controller ipr ,5711 ipr 5709 ipr ,5712 lpfc 6228 lpfc 6239 lpfc Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

49 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chplg.fm Description Linux Device Driver Linux Feature Number i5/os Feature Number PCI-X U320 RAID w/read Cache PCI-X Fibre Channel Disk Controller ipr lpfc WAN adapters Table 2-4 lists the WAN adapters supported on Linux on i5 for native I/O, or directly attached option. Table 2-4 WAN adapters supported for native I/O Linux partition Description Linux Device Driver Linux Feature Number i5/os Feature Number PCI Two-Line WAN icom PCI Two-Line WAN icom PCI Dual WAN/Modem icom PCI Dual WAN/Modem (ANSI) PCI Two-Line WAN w/modem PCI Two-Line WAN w/modem (CIM) icom icom icom PCI Quad Modem icom PCI Quad Modem (CIM) icom Chapter 2. Linux partition planning guide 35

50 6388chplg.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 2.2 Power control and console options This section provides two items of consideration before you actually configure the system for the Linux partition: How to set up the power control option and alternative console option Power control There are four types of power control of the Linux partition: Automatic start of the Linux partition: You choose this option when you add to the system profile the partition profile that you want to be activated by the managed system every time when the system starts up. Activate the Linux partition from HMC: This option is used to choose a special boot mode other than normal boot mode or to override the default boot mode defined in the partition profile. Special boot modes could include System Managed Services (SMS) boot mode or other diagnostic boot mode which are generally used for diagnosis purpose. All types or activation from HMC are explained on Figure 3-48 on page 82. Activate the Linux partition from i5/os: You choose this option when you want to start the Linux partition activating the NWSD. This option is valid when two conditions are met: NWSD s PWRCTL parameter value is *Yes Power Controlling option on the Linux partition profile has the i5/os partition as a power controlling partition Then you can start the Linux server from i5/os by either: Varying on NWSD Starting the Linux server from iseries Navigator Further information on this option can be found in Section, Creating NWSD on page 88. Activate the Linux partition with i5/os IPL: This option starts up the Linux partition when the i5/os partition starts up if all three conditions are met: NWSD s PWRCTL parameter s value is *Yes Power Controlling option on the Linux partition profile has the i5/os partition as a power controlling partition NWSD s ONLINE parameter s value is *Yes Linux console options In addition to regular console options, there are two special console options for your Linux partitions: The virtual console and the HMC s VTerm. They can be used for: The initial installation where TCP/IP configuration is not done yet on the Linux partition Solving problems that result in the Linux becoming inaccessible to the LAN Virtual console Virtual console is served through the server i5/os partition s Telnet server. Here s how it works: a. From any Telnet client, such as Windows PC or PuTTY, log in to the i5/os partition over port For example, on your DOS prompt, type: C:>telnet rchas b. Select the Linux partition ID. 36 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

51 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chplg.fm c. Log in using i5/os system services tool (SST) user ID and its password. d. Log in as any Linux user ID such as root. For the virtual console work properly, you need to configure the server i5/os partition and the client Linux partition with correct virtual serial adapters and matching slot numbers. For the exact configuration example, refer to Figure 3-53 on page 85. HMC s VTerm You can open the terminal sessions from the HMC to the i5/os partition, Linux partition, and AIX partition. You don t need to configure anything for this feature. It just comes with the HMC code itself. To start VTerm for the Linux partition from HMC, there are two ways: If the Linux partition has not been started yet, you need to activate the partition first to open a terminal session. Refer to step 2 on page 144. If the Linux partition is already started, on HMC main menu, select Server and Partition Server Management. Then choose the Linux partition and right click on it. Choose Open Terminal Session option to open a VTerm session. Chapter 2. Linux partition planning guide 37

52 6388chplg.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 2.3 System sizing for the Linux partition This section discusses the initial sizing for the Linux partition workload using IBM s Workload Estimator (WLE). WLE is a tool that runs in a Browser or PC and estimates the computer resources required for traditional workloads as core applications and new workloads, as Linux, WebSphere and Lotus workloads. Note: This tool is available on the web at: Figure 2-1 shows how the IBM Workload is present to us. Figure 2-1 Workload Estimator At this point you can select which kind of workload you want to manage in our example we choose Web Serving (Linux) Workload and File Serving (Linux Workload). To do this, add firs a new partition and then add the workloads as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

53 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chplg.fm Figure 2-2 Workload estimator - Choosing workloads Since here, the Workload estimator give us some meaningful information. For example it can suggest the using of shared processing and if the partition SLES 9 can support File and Web Serving workloads. Next, you have to give some extra information about each workload as we illustrated in Figure 2-3. This information can change the size of each partition, even can suggest to create and separate the Linux workloads. Figure 2-3 Workload estimator - specifying workloads Chapter 2. Linux partition planning guide 39

54 6388chplg.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am When you finish to customize all the workloads, the WLE shows two systems options. The immediate solution and the grow solution. Also the WLE gives some information about the utilizations of each workload in both systems options. An example is given on Figure 2-4. Figure 2-4 Workload estimator - Immediate and grow solutions 2.4 System configuration plan validation Now we have a system configuration plan on the paper. Before we actually perform the configuration and installation tasks, we need to validate our plan. This validation is even more important if you plan to include the existing hardware resources. We highly recommend to use LPAR Validation Tool, LVT, for this purpose. This section discusses how to use LVT to validate our system configuration plan LPAR Validation Tool LPAR Validation Tool provides a graphical interface and it works with the latest machine models and operating systems releases. As its name implies, it acts as a validator. It is a validation tool and does not actually perform and configuration changes. Our example is to give you an idea how to use LVT to create a valid LPARed system focusing on selecting which ethernet card to use as a directly attached network adapter to the Linux partition. 40 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

55 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chplg.fm Note: For further information and actual download of LVT, check: There are two books you might want to use along with LVT: IBM Eserver i5, iseries and AS/400e Builder, SG IBM Eserver i5 and iseries Handbook, GA Create a new file from the main LVT menu and select the system type, the processor feature, the system memory that you have, the number of partitions and the additional partition default OS that you want as illustrated in Figure 2-5. Click Next button. Figure 2-5 LPAR Validation Tool - System Selection 2. Next, give the configuration values to each partition. In our example we give s 1 processor to i5/os partition and 0.1 processor to Linux partition. Click Next to continue. Chapter 2. Linux partition planning guide 41

56 6388chplg.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 2-6 LPAR Validation Tool - Partition specifications 3. Then define the memory and the virtual I/O that your partitions will have. In our example we define 14 GB for i5/os and 2 GB for Linux. Also we define the i5/os as Server SCSI and Linux as SCSI client. Figure 2-7 LPAR Validation Tool - Partition specifications - continue 42 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

57 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chplg.fm as illustrated in Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-7 the upper field represents the total available resources.these values change as you allocate the resources to a specific partition. In the middle area you define each partition s resources such as shared processor, the total value of memory, the uncapped processor option and virtual I/O resources. At the bottom of the screen, you see the number of required OS lisence(s). As you key in specific values in uncapped option fields, this information will change. For example, if you check Uncapped for i5/os partition and select 2 for Uncapped Max, the number of OS/400 licenses will change to 2. Note: In Linux, the licenses number can vary depending on the distribution. The LPAR Validation Tool takes one license of Linux per uncapped max processor by default. Click to Finish button to continue. 4. Allocate the IOPs, IOAs, Drivers and Linux IOAs to the respective partition as illustrated in Figure 2-8. On the left pane, you work with the hardware that can be configured in the machine. On the right pane, you work with the slots or physical spaces of the machine. Each slot has a description that suggests what type of recourse can be put on it. The bottom of the screen is the tips and information pane. In our example, the tool says that the partition one or P1 requires a disk drive on slot P3, so you can start to allocate one disk drive in that position. Figure 2-8 LPAR Validation Tool - IOP, IOA, Drives and Linux IOA allocation 5. Validate all the resources. Click Validate Validate Partitions. Chapter 2. Linux partition planning guide 43

58 6388chplg.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 2-9 LPAR Validation Tool - Validating Partitions When everything is correct you receive a message that all the partition requirements have been satisfied as illustrated at the bottom information pane in Figure 2-9. Now we have the actual configuration of our machine. 6. Instead of purchasing a new network adapter, we are going to take an available adapter from the i5/os partition. To see which adapter is OK to take away and from which slot, we need do a search. To do that click on Linux tab if that tab is not already selected and choose the IOA as illustrated in Figure When you select a specific IOA from the left pane, LVT will show you from which slots you can take that resource away by highlighting them in pale blue. In our example, these are slots C04 and C02 at the bottom of the right pane. Note C01 is also highlighted but the resource is IOP, not IOA. 44 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

59 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chplg.fm Figure 2-10 LPAR Validation Tool - Attaching Linux IOA 7. Remove one of the ethernet adapters either from C04 or C02. Currently, they are dedicated to the P1 partition which is an i5/os partition. Click on Remove buttonthen the button changes to Add. 8. On the exactly same spot, which is now Add button, click on Add button to attach this IOA, the ethernet adapter, to the Linux partition. 9. Select the partition that will be the owner of the IOA as illustrated in Figure Click OK to apply the selection. Figure 2-11 LPAR Validation Tool -Selecting the partition for device Validate the configuration. Click Validate Validate Partitions. You have All partition requirements been satisfied message at the bottom pane and the IOA on slot C04 now belongs to P2 partition as illustrated in Figure Chapter 2. Linux partition planning guide 45

60 6388chplg.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 2-12 LPAR Validation Tool -Sample Configuration 520 Linux ethernet card placement 46 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

61 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm 3 Chapter 3. System configuration Even before we actually install the Linux distribution, we need to prepare the system to hold the Linux installation. This involves running Hardware Management Console (HMC) to create a Linux partition, creating Network Server Storage (NWSSTG) and Network Server Description (NWSD) on i5/os side and possibly configuring directly attached network adapters for Linux partition. In addition to providing step by step guide for these basic system configuration tasks, we also provide in this chapter how to update the HMC code and Licensed Internal Code just in case you need to update them to the latest available version. Our discussion of HMC here is focused on Linux partitions setup. For general discussion of HMC and LPAR, refer to Logical Partitions on IBM PowerPC A guide to working with LPAR on Power5 technology, SG Copyright IBM Corp All rights reserved. 47

62 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 3.1 HMC and Licensed Internal Code update HMC consists of essentially two pieces of code: One is HMC code itself for HMC box and the other is Licensed Internal Code which runs on the eserver i5 side. With Power5 processor on which eserver i5 is built, we use HMC to configure and manage LPAR partitions. HMC consolidates LPAR partitions configuration and management functions which were supported by iseries service tools and iseries Navigator. This section describes the steps of updating the HMC and Licensed Internal Code. Note: These steps are not required if your eserver i5 HMC and Licensed Internal Code are both post GA2 level. If this is the case, you may skip this section and jump to Section 3.2, Configuring Linux partition on page HMC code update You might need to update the HMC code to the latest version. If you are sure you have the latest version of HMC code on both HMC box and on eserver i5, you may skip this section. In case you need to update it, the following instructions show how to upgrade your HMC with the recovery CD media. 1. Take the IP configuration that connects your HMC console with your i/5 box. To do this, in your HMC console click on your server HMC Management HMC Configuration. Then click on Customize Network Settings task as illustrated in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 HMC Configuration - Customize Network Settings 48 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

63 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm 2. When the Customize Network Setting window appears, click on LAN Adapters tab as illustrated in Figure 3-2. Take eth0 and click on the Details button. Write down the address netmask and other network configuration and press Cancel button to go back to the HMC main menu. Note: This IP address of the Lan adapter eth0 is the one used for the direct connection between the HMC box and eserver i5 box. Figure 3-2 HMC Configuration - Customize Network Settings - LAN Adapters 3. Since we are going to update the HMC code, we need to save the current configuration. Otherwise, we will lose all current settings when we update the HMC code itself. To save the current configuration, expand License Internal Code Maintenance on the navigation area, then select HMC Code Update. On the content area, select Save Upgrade Data as illustrated in Figure 3-3. Chapter 3. System configuration 49

64 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-3 HMC Configuration - HMC Code Update 4. Select the Hard drive option as illustrated in Figure 3-4. Then click Continue. Figure 3-4 HMC Configuration - HMC Code Update - Save Upgrade Data 5. When successful operation message shows up as illustrated in Figure 3-5, click OK. Figure 3-5 HMC Configuration - HMC Code Update - Data request completed 50 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

65 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm 6. Reboot your HMC with the first CD of the recovery CD media to get the screen as illustrated in Figure 3-6. Figure 3-6 HMC configuration - Boot CD 1 7. Press F1 to perform an Upgrade. When Figure 3-7 appears, press F1 to continue. Figure 3-7 HMC configuration - Update Confirmation 8. When prompted to put CD 2, insert CD 2 and press enter. Repeat this for CD Select finish after the CD 3, then the HMC console will reboot. 10.At the login prompt as illustrated in Figure 3-8, log in with the default userid and password as illustrated below. This will start the wizard. Login: hscroot Password: abc123 Chapter 3. System configuration 51

66 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-8 Log in to HMC - Default User and Password 11.On the HMC main menu, click on HMC Management HMC Users, then choose Manage HMC Users and Access option as illustrated in Figure 3-9. Figure 3-9 HMC Configuration - HMC Users 12.In this menu, change the default password of hscroot. First, highlight the user hscroot, then select User Modify as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-10 HMC configuration - Modifying User Profiles 52 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

67 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm 13.Next, we need to configure IP address for the direct connection. On the HMC main menu and select HMC Management HMC Configuration. Then click Customize Network Settings task as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-11 HMC Configuration - Restoring Network Settings 14.For actual IP address, we use the one we collected from step 2 on page 49. Click on LAN Adapters tab, select the eth0 device and click on Details button as illustrated in Figure Fill in the LAN Adapters Details window the appropriate network and IP information to enable the communication between your i/5 box and your HMC console. Chapter 3. System configuration 53

68 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-12 HMC Configuration - Restoring Network Settings - LAN Adapter Details 15.Once IP configuration on the HMC box is done, we need the IP address on the eserver i5 side and add it as a managed system on HMC. There can be two cases in this step: One is the case you already know the IP address on the i5 side and the other case is you don t know the IP address and you need to find it first. In either case, on the HMC main menu, choose Server and Partition Server Management. From the menu bar, select Server Management Add Managed System(s) as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

69 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-13 HMC configuration - Server Management a. If you know the IP address, add its IP address and password on the screen shown in Figure 3-14 which is brought to you from the previous step. Figure 3-14 HMC configuration - adding managed systems b. If you do not know the IP address yet, then you need to find it out first. There are two ways of doing that: One is giving a proper range of the IP addresses and letting HMC find it for you. The other way is using Advanced System Management (ASM). First, to use the range way, click on Find managed systems radio button as illustrated in Figure 3-15 and give the proper range. This can take quite a bit long depending on the range. Chapter 3. System configuration 55

70 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-15 HMC configuration - finding managed systems c. Another way is to use ASM. This book does not discuss ASM in details. For the information of how to use ASM, refer to IBM eserver Hardware Information Center at: But briefly, ASM or ASMI (Advanced System Management Interface) is the interface to the service processor that allows you to perform general and administrator level service tasks such as reading service processor error logs, reading vital product data, setting up the service processor, and controlling the system power. The ASMI may also be referred to as the service processor menus. You can access the ASMI through a web browser or the HMC. From the ASM main menu as illustrated in Figure 3-16, log in with default userid/password sets. Possible combinations are general/general or admin/admin. 56 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

71 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-16 Advanced System Manager - Log in d. Choose Network Services Network Configuration as we shown in Figure In our example the ethernet device that is attached with the HMC console is the eth0. Figure 3-17 Advanced System Manager - Network Services e. Take the IP information and use it to Add Managed System. 16.When you are done with adding managed systems, click on Finish button to confirm that you want to add this system. Now we are restored to the system setup as illustrated in Figure Chapter 3. System configuration 57

72 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-18 HMC Configuration - Server Management - System Added Next step will be updating Licensed Internal Code Licensed Internal Code update LIC (Licensed Internal Code) is composed by the firmware. As with other software this firmware require a fix. To update the firmware you have two alternative methods: You can do this from HMC console or from the i5/os. Here we show you the way through HMC. Note: The License Internal Code upgrade is optional when you update the HMC code. It is desirable that both codes keep the same level. 1. Open the Server and Partition Server Management on the HMC. Verify the state of the machine as illustrated in Figure To update the License Internal Code, the state should be either No Power or Power Off or Ready or Standby. If the state is anything other than these, Operating for example, shutdown all the partitions to proceed. 58 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

73 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-19 Server Management - Machine State 2. Open the Licensed Internal Code Maintenance License Internal Code Update and click on Change Internal Code task as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-20 Licensed Internal Code Maintenance - License Internal Code Update 3. In the Licensed Internal Code window choose the target system that you want to apply the update as we shown in Figure Click OK to continue. Chapter 3. System configuration 59

74 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-21 License Internal Code Update- Target Object Selection 4. You can either choose to run the wizard or do it with manual selection. Here we choose the latter by selecting Select advanced features option as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-22 Change Internal Code - Select advanced features 5. The Advanced Features window appears as illustrated in Figure Select Install and activated (implied Retrieve) choice and click OK. 60 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

75 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-23 Change Internal Code - Advanced Features 6. The Specify LIC Repository window appears. Select the appropriate location where you have the update. In our scenario we use the update CD so we choose DVD drive option as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-24 Advanced Features - Specify LIC Repository 7. Then select the LIC level type and the accept option as we shown in Figure Chapter 3. System configuration 61

76 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-25 Install and Activate 8. On confirmation window, confirm with the OK button. Then a progress panel displays the results of your installation and activation. This concludes the update of both HMC code and Licensed Internal Code. 3.2 Configuring Linux partition We discuss the case of using virtual I/O here. Configuring an LPAR partition for Linux installation is a two step plus one optional step process: Step 1: Creating a logical partition using HMC console Step 2: Creating a Network Server Description (NWSD) and Network Server Storage (NWSSTG) objects on the server i5/os partition using 5250 command entry screen (you can create NWSSTG using iseries Navigator) and attaching them to the Linux partition (Optional) Step 3: Configuring directly attached network adapter in Linux partition. This step is required only if you have directly attached ethernet card while every other I/O device is served through virtual I/O. This section has two sub sections describing each step in further details. Complete procedure is illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

77 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-26 Linux installation Creating a logical partition using HMC console Partition profiles are new concept of eserver i5 LPAR. If you are new to LPAR or from previous version of LPAR on Power4 version of the eserver iseries (as with OS/400 V5R2 and previous versions), you will need to be familiar with this new concept. Refer to Logical Partitions on IBM PowerPC A guide to working with LPAR on Power5 technology, SG HMC has a wizard for both partition and partition profile creation. The following steps describe how to use this wizard. Note: To create a partition or system profile you must have privileges of super administrator or operator in the HMC. 1. On your HMC in Navigation Area select Server and Partition Server Management. Then do a right click over Partitions Create Logical Partition as illustrated in Figure Chapter 3. System configuration 63

78 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-27 Creating a new Partition 2. The Partition wizard appears. Fill the information about ID and partition name. Then select the environment of partition that you want to create. We choose AIX or Linux as illustrated in Figure Click Next to continue. Figure 3-28 Creating a new Environment 3. Next screen gives you an option for the partition to be a part of a group of partitions that can be managed by a workload application. We choose No as illustrated in Figure Click Next to continue. 64 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

79 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-29 Creating a new Partition - Workload Management Groups 4. Next step is creating a profile. As explained in Partition profile on page 9, this object specifies the characteristics of the partition such as the memory, processors, I/O devices and slots. As illustrated in Figure 3-30, give the name of the profile. In our example, we give the profile name of MariaT. Click Next to continue. Note: Do not check Use all resources in the system option. If you check it, the partition which is associated with this profile will try to get all the physical resources in the system when the partition profile is activated. If a partition owns all of the physical resources then there can only be one active partition on the system. Chapter 3. System configuration 65

80 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-30 Creating a new Partition - Logical Partition Profile 5. Next, we specify the memory size that the partition profile will manage as illustrated in Figure Use this page to specify the memory management information for this partition profile. You must specify three memory levels: The minimum memory is the minimum amount of memory that the logical partition must have to run. If the system cannot allocate this much of memory, the activation of this partition will fail. The desired memory is the amount of memory that you want the logical partition to have when you activate the logical partition. The maximum memory is the maximum amount of memory that the logical partition is allowed to have when you dynamically move memory. When the partition is activated an attempt will be made to allocate the "desired" amount of memory defined for the partition-profile -- if the amount of desired memory is not available then an additional check will be made to see if the amount of unallocated memory left on the Managed System is more then or equal to the "minimum" amount of memory defined for the partition profile. If the amount of memory is equal to or greater then the minimum defined memory then it will be allocated to the partition; otherwise the partition will fail to activate. 66 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

81 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-31 Creating a new Partition - Memory In our example the minimum quantity of memory that the partition can run is 512 MB, the desirable amount is 1 GB and the maximum that can allocate is 5 GB. Click Next to continue. Restriction: Dynamic memory movement is not available as of Linux kernel 2.6 and 2.4. Therefore, this feature is not available for Linux on i5 either. However, the memory will be recognized by Linux next time it is re-started 6. Next step is to choose for Shared or Dedicated processors. Dedicated means you are not sharing the processor with other partitions. With Shared option, you can utilize sub processor feature where each partition can run with 0.1 processing unit at minimum. While the minimum processor (for shared) is.10; the definition can be in the hudredths of processor units (e.g. 0.15). This is referred as micro-partitioning. In our example we choose the Shared option as illustrated in Figure Chapter 3. System configuration 67

82 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-32 Creating a new Partition - Processor 7. For Shared processor option, we choose the minimum, maximum and desired processing units of the partition. When the partition is activated an attempt will be made to allocate the "desired" amount of processors defined for the partition-profile -- if the amount of desired processors is not available then an additional check will be made to see if the amount of unallocated processors left on the Managed System is more then or equal to the "minimum" amount of processors defined for the partition profile. If the amount of processors is equal to or greater then the minimum defined processors then it will be allocated to the partition; otherwise the partition will fail to activate. As illustrated in Figure 3-33, we define 0.1 unit of a processor to be our minimum processing units, 1 processor power desired, and 1.5 as maximum processing units. Click on Advanced button. 68 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

83 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-33 Creating a new Partition - Processing Units 8. A screen as illustrated in Figure 3-34 is shown. We define two items in this step: Sharing modes of processing units and the virtual processor usage. For further information on sharing modes of processing units, refer to Capped/uncapped logical partitions on page 12. For further information on the virtual processor, refer to Virtual processors on page 11. Chapter 3. System configuration 69

84 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-34 Creating a new Partition - Advanced Processing Settings Click OK and the Next button in the processing settings windows. 9. Create Logical Partition Profile - I/O window as illustrated in Figure 3-35 appears. We are creating a Linux partition with everything virtual. Therefore, we do not need to add any I/O resource. Click Next to continue. 70 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

85 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-35 Creating a new Partition - I/O Note: If you want to see how to attach Hardware Resources for native I/O, go to Section 3.2.3, Configuring directly attached network card for Linux partition on page Next screen as illustrated in Figure 3-36 is to add I/O pools. In our example, we do not have I/O Pools so click Next to continue. Chapter 3. System configuration 71

86 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-36 Creating a new Partition - I/O Pools 11.Then the Virtual I/O Adapters window appears. Select Yes as illustrated in Figure Click Next button to continue. Attention: Ensure that your i5/os have PTF MF33433 loaded. If not, you cannot use Virtual devices. Figure 3-37 Creating a new Partition - Virtual I/O 12.Next screen is to define virtual adapters on the screen as illustrated in Figure First you define the total number of virtual adapter slots for this partition. Then as illustrated at the bottom of the screen, we can create various adapters such as ethernet, Serial, or SCSI adapters. 72 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

87 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Number of slots can be greater then the number of virtual adapters that will be defined for the partition. Having additional (unused) slots allows for additional virtual devices to be added to the partition (via DLPAR) without the need to restart the partition. In our example we create one SCSI adapter for virtual disk storage, one ethernet adapter for virtual ethernet, and two serial adapters for console. We create a SCSI adapter and an ethernet adapter in a Linux partition and a Serial adapter on an i5/os partition. Two server serial adapters (slot 0 and slot 1) are automatically allocated to each Logical Partition. Server serial adapter in slot 1 is used for HMC Console access; while the Server Serial adapter in slot 0 is available for other defined connections (such as virtual console through port 2301 of the hosting i5/os partition) With this in mind click on SCSI adapter and click on Create button. Figure 3-38 Creating a new Partition - Adding Virtual I/O - SCSI adapter 13.Then Figure 3-39 Virtual SCSI Adapter Properties appears. Note: After filling the fields as described in the sub steps, do not press OK button yet. We need to configure matching server partition first, then come back to this screen to finally press OK button. Chapter 3. System configuration 73

88 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am a b c d Figure 3-39 Creating a new Partition - Virtual SCSI Client Properties a. Specify the slot number to use for this virtual SCSI adapter. The slot number is used to identify the virtual adapter within the logical partition. The combination of the slot number and the logical partition ID uniquely identify this slot within the managed system. as illustrated in the screen, the first available slot number is 2 since 0 and 1 are taken by default serial adapters. b. This partition will be served by the server partition for disk storage space. Therefore, we select Client for adapter type. c. The name of the partition that offers the service is i5os whose partition ID is 4. d. The remote partition virtual slot number is the slot number where the Server type virtual adapter resides. In our example is the slot number 5 in partition i5os with partition ID of 4. Note: Here we assume slot number 5 is available in partition i5os but this might not be true. If that s the case, you ll need to check i5os partition properties first to see which slot number is available. Refer to step 14 to find out available slot number. IBM support suggests that when defining SCSI client-server pairs that different slot numbers should be used for the client partition and the server partition. The use of different slot numbers, while not technically required, facilitates better understanding during support calls. 14.At this point, we need to create a matching SCSI adapter on the server partition of i5os to represent as slot number 5 in partition 4. This SCSI adapter will be type server. To do this return to the HMC main menu (leave the screen as illustrated in Figure 3-39 alone). Choose Server and Partition Server Management then expand on the server partition, the partition named i5os in our example. Then right click on its profile, FredyC, and click on Properties as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

89 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-40 Creating a new Partition: Configuring profile server virtual SCSI Attention: Do not close the other window as illustrated in Figure The partition wizard still running! 15.Select the Virtual I/O tab as illustrated in Figure At the bottom of the screen, click on SCSI radio button, then click on Create button. Chapter 3. System configuration 75

90 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-41 Creating a new Partition: Configuring server Virtual I/O 16.A screen as illustrated in Figure 3-42 appears. We enter three items on this screen. First, the slot number. Select the slot number that you define as Remote partition virtual slot number as illustrated in Figure 3-39, slot number 5 in our example. Second, Adapter type should be Server. Lastly, for Connection Information, select the option Any remote partition and slot can connect. Click OK to complete the configuration on the server partition side. 76 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

91 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-42 Creating a new Partition - Virtual I/O Server Properties We need further explanation for the last input item of Connection Information, that is related to power control. If you are going to start the Linux server from HMC panel, this choice does not matter. But if you want to start it from the i5/os side, you need to pick Only selected remote partition and slot can connect option. In addition to this option, we need the following conditions to be met: We need to specify that Linux partition to be power controlled by a specific i5/os partition as illustrated in Figure 3-47 on page 81 and We need to specify Power control *YES in NWSD as illustrated in Figure 3-59 on page 89 then We can start the Linux partition, which we are creating now, from i5/os side by varying on NWSD. In this step, for now, we have chosen Any remote partition and slot can connect option because there is no Linux partition created yet (we are in the middle of that process). Later, we need to come back to this screen and pick this Linux partition instead of Any. Note: For other power control options discussion, refer to Section 2.2.1, Power control on page 36. Return to the Virtual SCSI Adapter Properties of your Linux partition as illustrated in Figure Now we can click OK to complete client side virtual SCSI adapter creation. Chapter 3. System configuration 77

92 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-43 Creating a new partition: Client side virtual SCSI adapter 17.As illustrated in Figure 3-44, the Client SCSI adapter is now created with slot number 2. Under Required column, check this newly created adapter as required. Next task is to create an adapter for virtual ethernet. For this, at the bottom of the screen, select ethernet radio button, then click on Create. Figure 3-44 Creating a new Partition - Adding Virtual I/O - ethernet adapter 18.Then Virtual Ethernet Adapter Properties screen as illustrated in Figure 3-45 appears. 78 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

93 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm a b c d Figure 3-45 Creating a new Partition - Virtual ethernet Properties a. Specify the slot number to use for this virtual ethernet adapter. The slot number is used to identify the virtual adapter within the logical partition. The combination of the slot number and the logical partition ID uniquely identify this slot within the managed system. as illustrated in the screen, the first available slot number is 3 since 0, 1, and 2 are already taken. b. Specify the ID number for the virtual Local Area Network (LAN) to which you want to connect this virtual ethernet adapter. This virtual LAN ID number can be any whole number from 1 to Important: To enable Virtual communications between the server and the client partitions you must have at least one virtual ethernet in the client partition using the same Port Virtual LAN ID as in the server partition. c. A trunk adapter is an ethernet adapter that links its LAN to an external network. This option enables that the virtual ethernet adapter can connect to other virtual networks or LAN IDs at the same time. 19.Click OK to add the virtual ethernet adapter to your Logical partition. Now as illustrated in Figure 3-46, the virtual ethernet device appears. Check this device as required. Then click on next button to continue the wizard. Chapter 3. System configuration 79

94 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-46 Creating a new partition - Adding virtual I/O Note: You need to increase the Number of virtual adapter slots if you wish to use more than 10 virtual adapters. 20.In Figure 3-47 you can select which logical partition have the authority to power on or power down the logical partition that you are creating. In other words, if you select this option you can power on the Linux partition from the Network Server Description (NWSD). By defining the "Power Controlling Partition" as the hosting i5/os partition, a vary off of the Network Server in i5/os will cause a shutdown signal to be sent to the Hypervisor to cause the partition to shutdown. Likewise, the shutdown of the partition will cause a shutdown signal to be sent to the Linux operating system. This handshaking between i5/os, hypervisor, and Linux allows for clean startup and shutdown of Linux (and associated partition) from a centralized location (i5/os) and provides for centralized management of all of the servers within the managed system. 80 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

95 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-47 Creating a new Partition - Power Controlling Partitions 21.After clicking on Next, you can select optional settings for the partition profile as described in Figure Chapter 3. System configuration 81

96 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am a b c e g d f Figure 3-48 Creating a new Partition - Optional Settings a. This option enables to the Service Focal Point to monitoring the connection between the Hardware Management Console and the logical partition. b. For hosted partitions, this option should be left unslected on the partition. To achieve automatic startup of the partition, the NWSD in the hosting partition should be set to 'Start at IPL *YES'. c. Boot mode Normal: The logical partition boots as normal mode. Note: When we are done with Linux partition creation, next step is registering this newly created partition to System Processor (SP). To do that, we will activate the partition. Registration is accomplished by powering on the partition. We re activating Linux partition now just to register with SP, note that we still need to complete configuration of Linux partition to begin Linux installation on newly created partition. d. Boot mode SMS: The logical partition boots to the System Management Services (SMS) mode. e. Boot mode DIAG_DEFAULT: The logical partition boots in default diagnosis mode. f. Boot mode DIAG_STORED: The logical partition boots using the service boot list saved in NVRAM. This option is useful to run online diagnostics 82 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

97 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm g. Boot mode OPEN_FIRMWARE: The logical partition boots to open firmware prompt. This options is useful to obtain aditional debug information. 22.Finally the Profile summary is displayed. Click finish to accept the creation of the partition profile. The new partition appears in your system management console as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-49 Server Management - Current Partitions 23.Activate the partition by right clicking on it and select Activate. On the screen as illustrated in Figure 3-50, be sure to check on Open a terminal window or console session, so that we can access SMS through HMC terminal window. Figure 3-50 Registering a newly created partition Chapter 3. System configuration 83

98 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 24.SMS boot screen shows as illustrated in Figure This tells us that partition registration on SP is done. We get the screen of Figure 3-51 here because we selected Open a terminal window or console session in step 23. Figure 3-51 SMS boot screen 25.Back on HMC main menu, right click on the partition and select Shut Down Partition to power it off as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-52 Shutting down a partition Select Immediate and click on OK. This completes the creation of a Linux partition. Virtual console setup Now we need to set up i5/os virtual console for the Linux partition. To do this we have to create a new virtual serial client connection on the i5/os side. Start configuring i5/os partition as illustrated in Figure 3-40 on page 75. Also select the tag Virtual I/O, then choose 84 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

99 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm to create a new Serial adapter and push the create button. Figure 3-53 appears on the screen. Note: This procedure is only necessary if you want to have a telnet 2301 console. a b c d Figure 3-53 Creating a new Partition - Virtual Adapter Client Properties a. The Slot number is the virtual position that the Virtual device will have in this case the position number 6. b. In this example the adapter type is client because the Linux Server is the server that uses the serial as a console connection. We do not need to create serial client serial as it is automatically created as illustrated in Figure 3-38 on page 73. c. The partition that offers the service is in this case is Linux on i5 and is identified with the partition id number 3. d. The remote partition virtual slot number is the slot number where the virtual device type server resides. In our example is the slot number 0. Note: i5/os partition will need to be reactivated to submit the changes that we make in the i5/os partition profile or you can add dynamically serial port without i5/os bring down and update i5/os partition profile for permanently serial connection i/5 OS side configuration steps Now we have everything prepared from HMC side. We then need to configure from the i5/os side. These tasks include: Creation of the Network Server Storage (NWSSTG) Creation of the Network Server Description (NWSD) Chapter 3. System configuration 85

100 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Attaching the NWSSTG with the NWSD Creation of a user profile from service tools that permits to use the virtual console Creating NWSSTG To use the virtual SCSI we need to create a NWSSTG in the i5/os server partition to serve the Linux client partition. There are two ways to create this NWSSTG: One is using the iseries Navigator and the other is using 5250 command entry screen. Creating NWSSTG using iseries Navigator These are the steps to create a NWSSTG using the iseries Navigator. 1. Open your iseries Navigator YourServer Network Windows Administration, then right click on Disk Drives and select New Disk as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-54 iseries Navigator - Creating New Disk 2. In Figure 3-55 specify the Disk drive name, a description as well as the size of the new Disk on Megas or Gigas. Click Ok to start the creation. 86 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

101 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-55 iseries Navigator - Defining New Disk 3. When it s done, your new disk appears in the navigator area as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-56 iseries Navigator - New Disk Created Using 5250 command entry screen These are the steps to create a NWSSTG using 5250 command entry screen. 1. Type the command CRTNWSSTG and then press F4 key. Then F9 to view all parameters. In Figure 3-57 we give an example of the creation. Fill the blanks as your convenience. Chapter 3. System configuration 87

102 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Type choices, press Enter. Create NWS Storage Space (CRTNWSSTG) Network server storage space.. > LINUXI5 Name Size > *CALC, megabytes From storage space *NONE Name, *NONE Format *OPEN *NTFS, *FAT, *FAT32, *OPEN... Auxiliary storage pool ID ASP device Name Cluster domain name Cluster port configuration: Connection port *VRTETH0, *VRTETH1... Cluster internet address... Cluster subnet mask..... Text 'description' Linux on i5 F9=All parameters F11=Keywords F14=Command string F24=More keys Bottom Figure 3-57 CRTNWSSTG command 2. Click Enter to start the process. When it is complete write the command WRKNWWSTG your new NWSSTG appears at we illustrate in Figure Work with Network Server Storage Spaces System: Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 6=Print 10=Add link 11=Remove link RCHAS10 Link Opt Name Server Seq Type Access Text LINUXI5 Linux on i5 Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Print list F9=Retrieve F11=Display link status F12=Cancel F17=Position to Bottom Figure 3-58 WRKNWSSTG command Creating NWSD A Network Server Description (NWSD) is used to give a name of the configuration on the i5/os side to start and stop the Linux partition and provides an access to the virtual disk(s), CD/DVD, tape and other I/O devices to Linux. NWSD also defines the boot environment for Linux (i.e., IPL parameters) as well as optional network settings that can be made available to Linux. 88 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

103 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm At an i5/os command line type CRTNWSD and press F4 for prompt as we shown in Figure Type choices, press Enter. Figure 3-59 CRTNWSD command Create Network Server Desc (CRTNWSD) Network server description... > LINUXI5 1 Name Resource name > CTL03 2 Name, *NONE, *AUTO Network server type > *GUEST 3 *WINDOWSNT, *GUEST Online at IPL > *NO 4 *YES, *NO Vary on wait *NOWAIT *NOWAIT, 1-15 minutes Shutdown timeout minutes Partition *NONE 5 Partition number Number, *NONE Domain role *DMNCTL *DMNCTL, *BKUCTL, *SERVER Propagate domain users..... *YES *YES, *NO Language version *PRIMARY *PRIMARY, 2963, 2966, Code page *LNGVER, 437, 850, 852, Server message queue *JOBLOG Name, *JOBLOG, *NONE Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB IPL source *NWSSTG *NWSSTG, *PANEL, *STMF, A... IPL stream file *NONE IPL parameters *NONE Power control *YES 8 *YES, *NO Authority *CHANGE Name, *CHANGE, *ALL, *USE... Text 'description' > 'Linux i5' 9 Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys 1. Network server description: In this parameter provide a name for NWSD. 2. Resource name: the resource name must be the name of the resource that is created from HMC. Also, you can use *AUTO for the resource name. This will allow the hosting partition to determine the resource name as part of the vary on process. If you still need to do determine the resource name manually, write WRKHDWRSC *CMN in a i5/os command line. Find resources type 290B. These connections are the VSCSI connection. To verify the correct resource follow this steps: Do an option 7 to display the resource details as illustrated on Figure Chapter 3. System configuration 89

104 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Work with Communication Resources Type options, press Enter. 5=Work with configuration descriptions System: 7=Display resource detail RCHAS10 Opt Resource Type Status Text CMN20 6B04 Operational Comm Port 7 CTL03 290B Operational Comm Adapter LIN06 6B04 Operational Comm Adapter CMN21 6B04 Operational Comm Port CTL03 290B Operational Comm Adapter CMB Operational MFIO Processor LIN Operational LAN Adapter CMN Operational Ethernet Port LIN Operational LAN Adapter CMN Operational Ethernet Port CMB Operational Combined function IOP LIN Not detected LAN Adapter CMN Not detected Ethernet Port CMB Operational Comm Processor LIN Operational LAN Adapter F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Print F12=Cancel Figure 3-60 Work with communication resources More... Then page down to see the adapter field as illustrated in Figure This number matches with the slot number of the virtual SCSI server adapter as illustrated in Figure 3-42 on page 77. Display Resource Detail Resource name : CTL03 Text : Comm Adapter Type-model : 290B-001 Serial number : Part number : System: RCHAS10 Location: U A36C-V1-C5 I/O bus 208 Adapter 5 Press Enter to continue. Bottom F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Print F12=Cancel Figure 3-61 Display resource detail 90 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

105 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Note: If you don t see correct resource for SCSI server adapter, or resource is not detected or not operational, you haven t reactivated i5/os partition using HMC. Reactivate i5/os partition using HMC. Usually, restart of the hosting i5/os partition is not recomended. Once the adapter is added through DLPAR, a restart of the Linux partition will be required to establish the linkage between client/server adapters and have the *AUTO setting work correctly. 3. Network server type: The server type is *GUEST. 4. Online IPL: Specifies whether this object is automatically varied on at initial program load (IPL). It is recommended to set to*yes for production enviroments. 5. Partition: Is the partition name, you can write the partition name or 6. Use the partition number from the HMC as we defined in Figure 3-30 on page For Linux partitions the code page is always 437. The code page is used for hypervisor to partition communications. The code page is a hold over from Windows Integration which allows for different code page values. 8. Power Control: You can choose *YES that enables the NWSD power on the partition, assuming that you enable this option in HMC as illustrated with Figure 3-47 on page 81. If you select *NO, that means vary on just makes the VSCSI resources available to the partition. In that case the partition only can be powered on by HMC. The recomendation is that Linux partitions with virtual I/O resources should always have this value set *YES and start Linux from the hosting i5/os partition rather then the HMC. 9. Text description : Is a description of this server. The other parameters as IPL source, IPL stream file and IPL parameter are covered in Section 4.1.2, Setting the NWSD parameters for initial Linux installation on page 119. Attaching the NWSSTG with the NWSD The last step is linking the NWSSTG with the NWSD. Again, there are two ways to do this: One, using the iseries Navigator and the other is using 5250 command entry screen. Linking from iseries Navigator 1. Open your iseries Navigator YourServer Network Windows Administration, then right click on Disk Drives and over the disk drive right click and select Add Link as illustrated in Figure Chapter 3. System configuration 91

106 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-62 iseries Navigator - Add Link Note: If you get error message like There are currently no servers that can be linked to disk drive Linuxi5 check version of iseries Navigator. 2. In Figure 3-63 specify the server to which you want to link the network server storage space as well as the Link sequence position if you have more than one NWSSTG for one server and the type of access that the server can connect with this Network Server Storage. Click OK to create the link. Figure 3-63 iseries Navigator - Linking NWSSTG y NWSD 3. When the NWSSTG is linked, the NWSD appears under the server column as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

107 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-64 iseries Navigator: NWSSTG and NWSD linked Using 5250 emulation Type the command ADDNWSSTGL and then press F4 key. Then F9 to view all parameters. In Figure 3-57 we give an example of the creation. Add Server Storage Link (ADDNWSSTGL) Type choices, press Enter. Network server storage space.. LINUXI5 Name Network server description... LINUXI5 Name Dynamic storage link *YES *NO, *YES Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys Figure 3-65 ADDNWSSTGL command Creating a Service Tools User Profile To work with Linux partitions using the virtual console, we need to create a Service Tools user profile using the i5/os System Service Tools. Note: This procedure is necessary only if you plan to use telnet on 2301 console. 1. Type the command STRSST and sign on with the valid user ID and password set. 2. Choose the option 8 (Work with service tools user IDs), then choose option number 1 (Service Tools user ID). Work with Service Tools User ID windows appears as illustrated in Figure Chapter 3. System configuration 93

108 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Work with Service Tools User IDs Type option, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change password 3=Delete 4=Display 5=Enable 6=Disable 7=Change privileges 8=Change description System: MARIAT Opt User ID Description Status QSECOFR QSECOFR Enabled QSRV QSRV Enabled Enabled Enabled F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel Figure 3-66 Work with Service Tools User IDs 3. Choose option 1 to create an user profile and write an user ID in our example the user ID is LNXUSR. When you press enter Figure 3-67 appears. Write the password and fill the other options as we indicated. Press enter to create the user. Create Service Tools User ID Service tools user ID name : LNXUSR Type choices, press Enter Password System: MARIAT Allow ID access before storage management recovery =Yes, 2=No Set password to expire =Yes, 2=No Description Linux console User F3=Exit F5=Change privilege F12=Cancel Figure 3-67 Create Service Tools User ID 4. Once it is created, in the Work with Service Tools User IDs window, our LNXUSR appears. Choose the option number 7 to change the privileges. Then change the privileges with option 2 as we illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

109 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Change Service Tools User Privileges Service tools user ID name : LNXUSR System: MARIAT Type option, press Enter. 1=Revoke 2=Grant Option Functions Status _ Disk units - operations Revoked _ Disk units - administration Revoked _ Disk units - read only Revoked 2 System partitions - operations Revoked 2 System partitions - administration Revoked 2 Partition remote panel key Revoked 2 Operator panel functions Revoked 2 Operating system initial program load(ipl) Revoked 2 Install Revoked 2 Performance data collector Granted 2 Hardware service manager Revoked 2 Display/Alter/Dump Revoked 2 Main storage dump Granted More... F3=Exit F5=Reset F9=Defaults F12=Cancel Figure 3-68 Change Service Tools User Privileges 5. Press enter then the status of the functions changes from Revoked to Granted as we shown in Figure Change Service Tools User Privileges System: Service tools user ID name : LNXUSR MARIAT Type option, press Enter. 1=Revoke 2=Grant Option Functions Status Disk units - operations Revoked Disk units - administration Revoked Disk units - read only Revoked System partitions - operations Granted System partitions - administration Granted Partition remote panel key Granted Operator panel functions Granted Main storage dump Granted More... F3=Exit F5=Reset F9=Defaults F12=Cancel Figure 3-69 Change Service Tools User Privileges - Granted Status Now you are all set in terms of configuring eserver i5 system to actually install Linux distribution in newly created Linux partition. The only possible thing left to do is configuring a directly attached network adapter for Linux partition if you plan to have Linux partition s own physical network interface. Chapter 3. System configuration 95

110 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Configuring directly attached network card for Linux partition As we discussed in Section 2.4, System configuration plan validation on page 40, it is highly recommended to use LPAR Validation Tool (LVT) for this task. LVT will help you to define which adapters are available for Linux partition. Here again, we are showing the steps of attaching a hardware resource, in this case a LAN IOA, to a Linux partition. As illustrated in Figure 3-70, we choose to use the ethernet card that resides in Slot C08 which is in the expansion tower. Figure 3-70 LPAR Validater - Choosing device to attach Note: A similar scenario is presented in Section 5.4.2, Configuring directly attached network adapter to Linux partition on page 211. The main difference between that scenario and this one is a matter of dynamic configuration. In this scenario, you need to IPL the i5/os partition and activate the Linux partition to take the change effective. In the other scenario, you need to boot the Linux partition but you don t need to IPL the i5/os partition. 1. From the HMC, you can see where your system resources have been assigned. On your HMC screen, select Server and Partition Server Management. Right click on the managed system and then select Properties. Select the physical I/O tab. Figure 3-71 lists the physical I/O resources for the managed system. Details on the I/O adapters and the logical partitions they are assigned to are displayed here. Verify that the ethernet adapter do not have any server associated. If not go to step 20 on page Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

111 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-71 Managed System - Physical I/O owner verification 2. In our case the owner of the slot C08 is the i5/os partition. Whit this in mind on iseries Navigator, select your eserver i5 system, then Configuration and Service Hardware All Hardware as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-72 iseries Navigator Verify every ethernet Port to find the match to Slot C08 from the LVT report as illustrated in Figure In our example we choose the CMN12 on LIN10. Right click over resource and click on Properties. Chapter 3. System configuration 97

112 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 3. Check the Serial Number of IOA from HMC managed system resources list. If this number matches with the serial number of the resource we got the correct adapter. To verify the slot check on Physical Location tab as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-73 Properties - General Tab 4. Under Physical Location tab, check Card position. as illustrated in Figure 3-74, the value of C08 matches with the number reported in LVT and in the HMC managed System. Figure 3-74 Properties - Physical Location 5. Assure that CMN12 resource defined as the Resource Name under General tab is not used by i5/os. Execute i5/os command WRKLIND and choose Option 5 to display the Line description as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

113 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Position to..... Work with Line Descriptions System: Starting characters MARIAT Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 6=Print 7=Rename 8=Work with status 9=Retrieve source Opt Line Type Text 5 ETHLINE *ELAN Site Ethline QESLINE *SDLC QTILINE *SDLC VETH0 *ELAN Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Create F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F14=Work with status Figure 3-75 Work with Line Descriptions Bottom 6. Verify if the resource, CMN12 in our example, is not used by any existing line description. For this, repeat this step for every line description with #ELAN type you see on the screen as illustrated in Figure In our case we can proceed with the attachment because the resource name that we choose on Figure 3-73 is different that the line description resource name as we shown in Figure If both line descriptions match, you must choose another device to attach or configure another line that supports the i5/os connections. Line description : Option : Category of line : Display Line Description ETHLINE *BASIC *ELAN Resource name : CMN03 Online at IPL : *YES Vary on wait : *NOWAIT Network controller : ETHLINET Local adapter address : 00096B65363C Exchange identifier : 056C9CF0 Ethernet standard : *ALL Line speed : *AUTO Current line speed : 100M Duplex : *AUTO Current duplex : *FULL Maximum frame size : 1496 Maximum controllers : 40 Press Enter to continue. MARIAT 08/05/04 16:56:32 More... F3=Exit F11=Display keywords F12=Cancel Figure 3-76 Display Line Description Chapter 3. System configuration 99

114 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 7. The next procedure is to do a physical shutdown to the device. Go to the Service Tools menu. In a 5250 terminal execute the command STRSST and log in with a valid SST user as illustrated in Figure Type choice, press Enter. Service tools user ID.... QSECOFR Service tools password... Start Service Tools (STRSST) Sign On SYSTEM: MARIAT Note: The password is case-sensitive. F3=Exit F9=Change Password F12=Cancel Figure 3-77 Start Service Tools 8. On the System Service Tools menu select Option 1 Start a service Tool as illustrated in Figure Select one of the following: System Service Tools (SST) 1. Start a service tool 2. Work with active service tools 3. Work with disk units 4. Work with diskette data recovery 5. Work with system partitions 6. Work with system capacity 7. Work with system security 8. Work with service tools user IDs and Devices Selection 1 F3=Exit F10=Command entry F12=Cancel Figure 3-78 System Service Tools menu. 9. On Figure 3-79 select Option 7 Hardware service manager. This option lets us display, work with, and print the stored hardware resource information. 100 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

115 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Start a Service Tool Warning: Incorrect use of this service tool can cause damage to data in this system. Contact your service representative for assistance. Select one of the following: 1. Product activity log 2. Trace Licensed Internal Code 3. Work with communications trace 4. Display/Alter/Dump 5. Licensed Internal Code log 6. Main storage dump manager 7. Hardware service manager Selection 7 F3=Exit F12=Cancel F16=SST menu Figure 3-79 Start a Service Tool 10.In the Hardware Service Manager as illustrated in Figure 3-80, choose Option 1 to work with the packaging hardware resources. Hardware Service Manager Attention: This utility is provided for service representative use only. System unit : Release : A36C V5R3M0 Select one of the following: 1. Packaging hardware resources (systems, frames, cards,...) 2. Logical hardware resources (buses, IOPs, controllers,...) 3. Locate resource by resource name 4. Failed and non-reporting hardware resources 5. System power control network (SPCN) 6. Work with service action log 7. Display label location work sheet 8. Device Concurrent Maintenance 9. Work with resources containing cache battery packs Selection 1 Bottom F3=Exit F6=Print configuration F9=Display card gap information F10=Display resources requiring attention F12=Cancel Figure 3-80 Hardware Service Manager Chapter 3. System configuration 101

116 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 11.As reported in Figure 3-70 on page 96., the ethernet card is on the Expansion Unit. Select 9 over Expansion Unit to see the hardware contained in that unit as illustrated in Figure Packaging Hardware Resources Figure 3-81 Packaging Hardware Resources Local system type.... : 9406 Local system serial number: 10-8A36C Type options, press Enter. 2=Change detail 3=Concurrent maintenance 4=Remove 5=Display detail 8=Associated logical resource(s) 9=Hardware contained within package Type- Resource Opt Description Model Unit ID Name System U A36C SYS01 System Unit + 787A-001 U787A.001.DNZ00RT FR01 9 System Expansion Unit U C FR02 Virtual IOP + 268C-001 U A36C P16 Tape Unit % U787A.001.DNZ00RT SD003 Tape Unit SD002 Optical Storage Unit = U787A.001.DNZ00RT SD001 Bottom F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Print F8=Exclude non-reporting resources F9=Reserve frame space 10=Non-reporting resources F11=Display SPCN system information F12=Cancel F13=Unresolved locations There are resources with unresolved locations. Press F13 to see list. 12.In the Packaging Hardware Resources select Option 3 before the Communications IOA with Location value of CB1-C Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

117 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Packaging Hardware Resources Unit ID: U C Type options, press Enter. 2=Change detail 3=Concurrent maintenance 4=Remove 5=Display detail 8=Associated logical resource(s) 9=Hardware contained within package Type- Resource Opt Description Model Name Location System Expansion Unit FR02 Backplane 28BE P03 CB1 Combined Function IOP P55 CB1-C01 Storage IOA P61 CB1-C02 Combined Function IOP P54 CB1-C03 Storage IOA P60 CB1-C04 HSL I/O Bridge 28E7 P04 CB1-C05 Combined Function IOP P56 CB1-C06 Storage IOA P57 CB1-C07 3 Communications IOA P82 CB1-C08 Communications Port P59 CB1-C08-T1 Backplane 28B9 P36 DB1 Disk Unit P67 DB1-D01 More... F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Print F7=Include empty positions F8=Exclude non-reporting resources F10=Non-reporting resources F12=Cancel F13=Unresolved locations Figure 3-82 Packaging Hardware Resources 13.On Figure 3-83, press F9 if the Power Status is on. Hardware Resource Concurrent Maintenance Unit ID: U C Type options, press Enter. 2=Toggle LED blink off/on 5=Display detail 8=Associated logical resource(s) Power Opt Description Type-Model Status Position Communications IOA > On CB1-C08 Communications Port On CB1-C08-T1 F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Print F7=Display partition information F8=Display resource names F9=Power off domain F10=Power on domain F11=In-use resources F12=Cancel F14=Work with controlling resources Figure 3-83 Hardware Resource Concurrent Maintenance Chapter 3. System configuration 103

118 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 14.Then Hardware Resource Concurrent Maintenance utility asks to confirm power off the IOA as illustrated in Figure Press Enter to begin power off. Hardware Resource Concurrent Maintenance You have selected to power off a power domain. The following resources will be affected. No further confirmation screens will be displayed. Type- Resource Description Model Name Location Communications IOA > P58 CB1-C08 Communications Port P59 CB1-C08-T1 Press Enter to begin power off. Press F12 to cancel this request. F3=Exit F12=Cancel Figure 3-84 Hardware Resource Concurrent Maintenance - Power off confirmation 15.When the IOA is powered off, >? sign appears next to the IOA as illustrated in Figure Hardware Resource Concurrent Maintenance Unit ID: U C Type options, press Enter. 2=Toggle LED blink off/on 5=Display detail 8=Associated logical resource(s) Power Opt Description Type-Model Status Position Communications IOA >? Off CB1-C08 Communications Port? Off CB1-C08-T1 F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Print F7=Display partition information F8=Display resource names F9=Power off domain F10=Power on domain F11=In-use resources F12=Cancel F14=Work with controlling resources Power off complete. Check power indicator (LED) to confirm. Figure 3-85 Hardware Resource Concurrent Maintenance - Device Powered off 16.Open your HMC main menu. Select Server and Partition Server Management, click on Partitions and right click over partition profile of your i5/os partition and select Properties as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

119 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-86 Attaching Hardware Devices - Changing i5/os Profile 17.On Logical Partition Profile Properties window, select Physical I/O tab as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-87 Logical Partition Profile Properties - General Tab 18.At the bottom half of the screen as illustrated in Figure 3-88, find the resource of Slot C08 and uncheck the checkmark box under Required column. Then Remove the I/O device. Chapter 3. System configuration 105

120 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-88 Logical partition profile properties - Removing physical I/O 19.Click OK to submit the changes on the partition profile as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

121 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-89 Logical Partition Profile Properties - Physical I/O Tab 20.Return to the HMC main menu. Select Server and Partition Server Management, click on Partitions and right click over partition profile of your Linux partition and select Properties as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-90 Attaching Hardware Devices - Changing Linux Profile Chapter 3. System configuration 107

122 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 21.On Logical Partition Profile Properties select Physical I/O as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-91 Logical Partition Profile Properties - General Tab 22.Over Managed system I/O devices select the device that you want to attach to the Linux server. Click on Add as required as we shown in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

123 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Figure 3-92 Logical Partition Profile Properties - Physical I/O Tab - Adding Resources 23.Check if the correct device is selected as illustrated in Figure Click OK to submit the changes. Chapter 3. System configuration 109

124 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 3-93 Logical Partition Profile Properties - Physical I/O Tab 24.Those changes applies the next time that you boot server (i5/os) and client (Linux) partition. Note: DLPAR can be used to cause the adapter to be added to the partition without the need for a partition restart. If you do this procedure after Linux installation the next time that you connect to the GUI interface be for KDE or other graphical environment. At the moment that you log on as root on SLES system you can see the following message as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-94 SUSE KDE Environment - New Hardware found Click Yes to configure this new adapter. In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 you can use Red Hat Setup utility by issuing command: setup 110 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

125 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chcnf.fm Select Network configuration and configure new adapter as illustrated in Figure Figure 3-95 Red Hat network configuration Chapter 3. System configuration 111

126 6388chcnf.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 112 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

127 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm 4 Chapter 4. Linux installation This chapter discusses the steps of the Linux distribution installation. Before we install Linux, we need to set up a logical partition for Linux. If you have not done it yet, refer to Chapter 3, System configuration on page 47. This chapter consists of following topics: Pre-requisite tasks for the installation SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 installation SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 installation using GUI mode SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 installation using text mode Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 installation Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 installation using GUI mode Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 installation using text mode Copyright IBM Corp All rights reserved. 113

128 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 4.1 Pre-requisite tasks for the installation In addition to creating a logical partition for Linux server, there are two more tasks we need to execute before the actual installation of Linux. They are: Virtual LAN configuration: If you are installing Linux using GUI mode which involves VNC client to VNC server connection, we need to make virtual LAN, also known as virtual ethernet connection up and running. Set up IPL related parameters in the NWSD description to enable the boot option from the installation media such as CDs Configuring virtual LAN connection We configure virtual LAN connection so that the server i5/os partition and the client Linux partition can communicate through the internal ethernet link. This involves in the following steps: 1. Define the IP addressing scheme and route. 2. Configure a line description in the i5/os partition and setup the interfaces and routes. 3. Configure in both sides of the virtual LAN scheme and route that you define in step 1. IP addressing scheme and route There are three methods of connecting your client partition to a virtual LAN: Proxy ARP, TCP/IP routing, and Network Address Translator (NAT). In this section, we provide the configuration example for NAT. Note: The simplest configuration is using a directly attached LAN adapter to communicate with an external LAN. This scenario is covered in Section 3.2.3, Configuring directly attached network card for Linux partition on page 96. Method 1: Proxy ARP This method is called a transparent subnetting to associate the client partition with an external interface. You can use this method if you have enough number of globally routable IP addresses available. More information can be reached on Linux on the IBM ~ iseries Server: An Implementation Guide, SG Method 2: TCP/IP Routing Standard TCP/IP routing is used to route traffic to the new virtual LAN segment in the same way you would define routing to any other LAN segment. This requires updating routing information throughout your network. More information can be reached on Linux on the IBM ~ iseries Server: An Implementation Guide, SG Method 3: Network Address Translator i5/os packet filtering can be used to route traffic between a partition and the outside network as illustrated in Figure 4-1. The following steps explain how to configure your i5/os partition and your Linux partition to be connected through NAT. 114 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

129 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-1 Networking - NAT 1. Create an ethernet line description for your virtual LAN. To see which resource is the correct one, execute 5250 command WRKHDWRSC *CMN, then search for a resource type 268C for ethernet Port. Take option 7 for the resource, press Enter, then scroll down to check the adapter number as illustrated in Figure 4-2. This step is to assure that this device is the correct one that you configure when you create the partition. As we define in Figure 3-45 on page 79 the slot ID of the virtual ethernet is 3. This number must match with the adapter number of the server partition. Display Resource Detail Resource name : CMN10 Text : Ethernet Port Type-model : 268C-001 Serial number : Part number : System: MARIAT Location: U A36C-V4-C3-T1 I/O bus 208 Adapter 3 Port 0 Press Enter to continue. Bottom F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Print F12=Cancel Figure 4-2 Display Resource Detail - CMN10 Adapter 3 2. Create the line description using verified resource of CMN10: CRTLINETH LIND(VETH0) RSRCNAME(CMN10) LINESPEED(1G) DUPLEX(*FULL) 3. Verify if the line description that you created is started. To do this type: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*LIN) CFGD(VETH0) If the status is varied off choose option 1 to start the line. 4. Now create the interface of your virtual line description. Type: ADDTCPIFC INTNETADR(' ') LIND(VETH0) SUBNETMASK(' ') Chapter 4. Linux installation 115

130 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am where INTNETADR is the internal IP address on the i5/os partition side. This will function as a gateway to VLAN subnet. 5. Start the interface that you created with the following command: STRTCPIFC INTNETADR(' ') 6. To confirm the interface, type: PING Create another TCP/IP interface which will connect the internal virtual network with the external network. Use the same line description of your existing external TCP/IP interface. The TCP/IP interface created in this step performs the address translation. In our example, we use the IP address of for this interface. Be sure to use the correct LIND that you use for external communications. Type: ADDTCPIFC INTNETADR(' ') LIND(ETHLINE) SUBNETMASK(' ') 8. Start new interface: STRTCPIFC INTNETADR(' ') 9. Allow the IP forwarding using the following command in 5250 terminal CHGTCPA IPDTGFWD(*YES) 10.On iseries Navigator, select Network IP Policies Packet Rules and select Rules Editor as illustrated in Figure 4-3. Warning: Configuring Packet Rules is very sensitive process because you can completely cut off your i5/os from your network. Take extreme caution while defining these rules. Figure 4-3 IP Policies - Packet Rules - Rules Editor 11.In the welcome window of the Rules Editor select Create a new packet rules file as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

131 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-4 Rules Editor Welcome Window 12.In the text editor insert the rules of mapping as illustrated in Example 4-1. Example 4-1 NAT example ADDRESS LINUXPART IP= TYPE=TRUSTED ADDRESS SHELL IP= TYPE=BORDER MAP LINUXPART TO SHELL LINE=ETHLINE JRN=OFF a b c a. In this position you insert the IP address of your Linux partition. b. In this position add the IP address that you define as translator. Note: This IP adress is NOT your primary i5/os IP but new IP address you configured in step 7. c. Here is where the mapping occurs. 13.Save the file and verify the rules by File Verify Rules as illustrated in Figure 4-5. Chapter 4. Linux installation 117

132 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-5 Verifying rules 14.If the rules are sucessfully verified activate it by File Activate Rules as illustrated in Figure 4-6. Figure 4-6 Activating rules After activating rules, from i5/os 5250 terminal type: RMVTCPTBL TBL(*ALL) 118 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

133 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm to clear the TCP table. This concludes virtual LAN configuration Setting the NWSD parameters for initial Linux installation At initial installation of Linux distributions, installation images need to be accessed either from CD ROM drive in i5/os partition (QOPT) or file systems in i5/os s IFS (Integrated File System). For this, again only at the time of initial Linux installation, we need to change IPL related parameters of the NWSD so that Linux distribution installation images will be read from i5/os s file system. We use CD ROM drive to install Linux in our example. In this section, we show you the way to tell the NWSD where the source code is that can be loaded for the installation. On 5250 command entry screen, type: CHGNWSD (LINUXI5) where LINUXI5 is the name of the NWSD we created in Creating NWSD on page 88. Press F4 for a prompt screen. Change the values of IP source, IPL stream file and IPL parameters as illustrated in Figure 4-7. Change Network Server Desc (CHGNWSD) Type choices, press Enter. TCP/IP local domain name.... *SYS TCP/IP name server system... *SYS + for more values Restricted device resources.. *NONE Name, *SAME, *NONE, *ALL... + for more values Synchronize date and time... *NO *SAME, *TYPE, *YES, *NO IPL source *STMF *SAME, *NWSSTG, *PANEL... IPL stream file '/QOPT/SU90SP1.P01/INSTALL' IPL parameters 'vnc=1 vnc_password=ch33se' More... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys Figure 4-7 Setting the NWSD parameters for initial Linux installation Note: PTF MF33501 is required to do installation using ISOs in IFS. 1. IPL source: This parameter defines where the kernel is located that the server will be booted. This parameter has the following options: a. *STMF: It means that the boot source is in the IFS. For installation, this option has to be taken because the kernel image resides in the CD-ROM and this image is mounted in the IFS as /QOPT. Chapter 4. Linux installation 119

134 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am b. *NWSSTG: It means that the boot source resides in the virtual disk associated with the NWSD. This option is for regular system boot once the installation is done. 2. IPL stream file: This parameter is only valid when IPL source parameter is set with *STMF. It contains the full path name where the kernel image resides. The actual value differs depending on the distribution. Refer to Table 4-1 for values used for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 and Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4. Table 4-1 Values for IPL source Distribution SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 IPL source /QOPT/SU90SP1.P01/INSTALL /QOPT/RED_HAT/IMAGES/PSERIES/NETBOO T.IMG 3. IPL parameters: If you do not set any parameters, for example you choose the value of *NONE, the installation will be on text mode. If you want to install in graphical user interface (GUI) mode, you give a certain value. Again, the actual value differs depending on the distribution. Refer to Table 4-2 for values used for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 and Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4. In our example, we used the value ch33se as a password for VNC session. Table 4-2 Values for IPL parameters Distribution SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 IPL parameters for GUI mode vnc=1 vnc_password=ch33se vnc vncpassword=ch33se Attention: Do not use the source image ISERIES64 for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1. This source only works on iseries machines not on IBM ^ i5. 4. Power control: Set power control to *YES to boot from *STMF. See Section 2.2, Power control and console options on page 36 for more information. 4.2 SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 installation using GUI mode We can install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 either using GUI mode or text mode. This section describes the installation steps using GUI mode. 1. Establish a connection through HMC virtual console or telnet to i5/os s 2301 port. It gives you the list of guest partitions created in the system. Select the correct partition ID. In our example, as illustrated in Figure 4-8, we only have one guest partition with the partition ID of 3. We choose it. Then log on using the service tools user profile. 120 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

135 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm OS/400 Guest Partition Consoles 3: Linux(V4-C6/V3-C0) Enter the console partition number: 3 Linux: Enter OS/400 service tools userid: LNXUSR Linux: Enter OS/400 service tools password: Linux: Console connecting... Linux: Console connected. Figure 4-8 Telnet session to server using port 2301 When you see the message such as Linux: Console connected. as illustrated as the last line of the screen in Figure 4-8, leave this session as it is. We need to activate NWSD and related Linux partition to get the console screen as illustrated in Figure Note: For virtual console correctly working, you need to complete two previous steps: a. You need to create a service tools user profile as described in Section, Creating a Service Tools User Profile on page 93. b. You need to create a virtual serial adapter with client type as described in Figure 3-53 on page 85. c. Virtual console and Power control described on Section 2.2, Power control and console options on page On 5250 command entry screen, type: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) CFGD(LINUXI5) Then vary on NWSD by taking Option 1 as illustrated in Figure 4-9. Chapter 4. Linux installation 121

136 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Position to..... Work with Configuration Status Starting characters MARIAT 07/29/04 21:43:42 Type options, press Enter. 1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 8=Work with description 9=Display mode status 13=Work with APPN status... Opt Description Status Job LINUXI5 VARIED OFF Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F23=More options F24=More keys Bottom Figure 4-9 Work with Configuration Status - Vary On NWSD Check if the status goes into VARY ON by pressing F5 Note: If you cannot vary on partition, check if you configured specific partition in SCSI server configuration on i5os side in HMC. Option Any remote partition and slot can connect is not supported for varying on from i5/os side as illustrated in Figure 3-42 on page 77. Also, newly created partition should be activated at least once from HMC which is done in Figure 3-50 on page When vary on NWSD, the telnet session to i5/os partition as illustrated in Figure 4-8 changes to a console session to a Linux partition as illustrated in Figure This particular screen shows the Hardware recognition process has been initiated. 122 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

137 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM 1 = SMS Menu 5 = Default Boot List 8 = Open Firmware Prompt 6 = Stored Boot List memory keyboard network scsi speaker Figure 4-10 Partition Booting - Hardware recognition 4. Now the kernel source is being loaded to the Linux partition. The installation wizard prompts the questions including the IP addresses and netmask info as illustrated in Figure >>> SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 9 installation program v (c) SU SE LINUX AG <<< Starting hardware detection... Searching for info file... Automatic configuration via DHCP? 1) Yes 2) No > 2 Enter your IP address> Enter your netmask. For a normal class C network, this is usually [ ]> If you need a gateway to reach the server, enter the IP address of the gateway. If you do not need a gateway, enter your own IP address [ ]> Enter the IP address of your name server. If you do not use a name server, press ESC [ ]> Figure 4-11 Installation Wizard - Questions and Answers Chapter 4. Linux installation 123

138 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 5. Then the installation wizard gives us the instructions of how to start the graphical environment using VNC as illustrated in Figure Loading data into RAM disk... (56660 kb)... creating device nodes... done integrating the shared objects of the installation system... starting syslog (messages are logged to /dev/tty4)... starting klogd... integrating kernel modules of the installation system... starting slpd to anounce VNC... starting yast... OK starting VNC server... a log can be found in /tmp/vncserver.log... *** *** You can connect to , display :1 now with vncviewer *** Or use a Java capable browser on *** (When YaST2 is finished, close your VNC viewer and return to this window.) Figure 4-12 Installation Wizard - VNC connection parameters 6. Now open your VNC Client and log in to the VNC Server running in Linux partition as illustrated in Figure For more information about VNC, check Section, VNC on page 21. As we are using NATas illustrated, do not use the IP address shown on Linux console. Instead, use the IP address of the external TCP/IP interface of your i5/os partition which is configured for the virtual LAN as described in Section, Method 3: Network Address Translator on page 114. NAT function in i5/os will translate this IP address into the Linux partition s virtual ethernet interface address. Figure 4-13 VNC Client - Connection details Note: Later versions of VNC have to be configured to use only protocol version 3.3; otherwise the VNC connection will not work and the installation screens will not be displayed. 7. Then the VNC Client prompts for the password. This password is the one that you defined in the NWSD in our example ch33se. Graphical installation wizard appears as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

139 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-14 VNC Client - YAST2 Graphic Installation Wizard 8. Click I Agree to accept the License Agreement then select the language of your Linux operation system as illustrated in Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 125

140 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-15 YAST2 - Selecting Language 9. Then an error as illustrated in Figure 4-16 appears. Ignore this error message. /dev/sdb is a temporary device containing the stream files being pulled from the CD ROM. In terms of real, physical disk space, we only have one disk space of /dev/sda because we have created only one NWSSTG for this Linux partition. What this message is saying is that we cannot modify the contents of /dev/sdb which is perfectly logical at this point. Note: The last letter of this virtual disk might be different depending on the number of disks, in other word the number of NWSSTGs. In our example, we just have one disk for installation (/dev/sda, that is) so the installation process takes the next available letter b as in /dev/sdb. If, for example, you had three NWSSTGs created for the Linux partition, the virtual disk that contains the stream files will be /dev/sdd. 126 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

141 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-16 Error partitioning /dev/sdb 10.Next, you get the chance to change or view details on installation settings such as Keyboard layout, Language, the Partitioning, Software, the Time Zone and also the Default Runlevel as illustrated in Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 127

142 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-17 YAST2 - Installation Settings 11.Click Yes, install on the screen shown in Figure With that, the installation wizard starts formatting the Linux disks for installation. 128 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

143 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-18 YAST2 - Committing Settings 12.If you are installing using CDs, the installation wizard prompts the screen asking for next CD as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-19 YAST2 - Changing source media Note: If you are installing from virtual CD you may have to press the OK button twice after inserting the second CD. 13.When the load is done the installation wizard automatically reboots the partition. When you get the screen as illustrated in Figure 4-20 on your virtual console, you need to shutdown the Linux partition from the i5/os side. >>> SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 9 installation program v (c) SU SE LINUX AG <<< Starting hardware detection... Searching for info file... Make sure that CD number 1 is in your drive. 1) OK 2) Back > Figure 4-20 Telnet session port 2301 Chapter 4. Linux installation 129

144 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 14.To shutdown the Linux partition from the i5/os side, type: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) CFGD(LINUXI5) where, in our example, CFGD parameter is LINUXI5. Choose option 2 to shutdown the partition. In addition to vary off the NWSD, you may also need to shutdown the partition through the HMC. Wait until you see a Vary Off in the status column. 15.Then choose option 8 to work with description. In the Work with Network Server Description window, choose option 2 to change the IPL source, IPL stream file and IPL parameters as we illustrated in Figure We make these changes so that the system will load from the installed source rather than the initial installation media such as CDs. Type choices, press Enter. Change Network Server Desc (CHGNWSD) TCP/IP local domain name.... *SYS TCP/IP name server system... *SYS + for more values Restricted device resources.. *NONE Name, *SAME, *NONE, *ALL... + for more values Synchronize date and time... *NO *SAME, *TYPE, *YES, *NO IPL source *NWSSTG a *SAME, *NWSSTG, *PANEL... IPL stream file *SAME b IPL parameters 'root=/dev/sda3' c More... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys Figure 4-21 Changing IPL Parameters a. IPL source: This parameter defines where the kernel is located that the server will be booted. Now we need to change this value from *STMF to *NWSSTG for the initial load is done. Now the boot source resides in the virtual disk associated with the NWSD and normal system boot will take place. b. IPL stream file: This parameter is only valid when IPL source parameter is set with *STMF. Now the value for IPL source parameter is *NWSSTG. Therefore, whatever the value this parameter might have, it is ignored. c. IPL parameters: Specifies a string of characters that will be passed to the load image at IPL time. It consists of commands or configuration information for the guest operating system. Specify a string of up to 256 characters containing the IPL parameters to be passed to the load image. In case of SLES 9, you give the value of *NONE. 16.Start the Linux partition. Type: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) CFGD(LINUXI5) Then choose option 1 to Vary on the partition. In the telnet session the message changes as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

145 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm *** *** Please return to your X-Server screen to finish installation *** starting VNC server... a log can be found in /tmp/vncserver.log... *** *** You can connect to , display :1 now with vncviewer *** Or use a Java capable browser on *** (When YaST2 is finished, close your VNC viewer and return to this window.) Figure 4-22 Telnet session port Continue installation message 17.Open a VNC Client again. This time, you need to use appropriate user ID and password as illustrated in Figure Give a password for user root. Use the expert option to choose any special form to encrypt the password. Click Next to start the network configuration. Figure 4-23 YAST 2 - Configuring System Administrator 18.In the Network configuration window, define any special characteristic to the LAN. The wizard configures this based on the actual connection settings. Start with The Network Interfaces link as we shown in Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 131

146 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-24 Network Configuration - Network Interfaces 19.Configure the name of the server and the options for name resolution. Select the device that is already configured. In our example, a virtual ethernet card is already configured. Select this one by pushing Change button as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-25 Network Configuration - Change option 20.Choose the device that you want to change clicking on Edit button as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

147 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-26 Network Card configuration Overview 21.Next we setup the network interface as illustrated in Figure The setup window has two configuration items: One, setup method as illustrated at the top half of the screen, and two, detailed settings as illustrated at the bottom half. The setup method is for using DHCP or manually maintained static IP address and subnet mask. We leave it as is configured. Figure 4-27 Network address setup 22.Detailed settings is for Host name and DNS configuration, routing options and some advanced topics. First, we work on Host name and name server configuration. Configure the name server, the domain information, the name server and domain search list as illustrated in Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 133

148 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-28 Host name and name server configuration 23.Click OK to submit the changes then choose the Routing option as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-29 Detailed settings - Routing 24.In the routing window you can verify your gateway. Also you can enable IP Forwarding for the route as illustrated in Figure Click OK to submit the changes. 134 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

149 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-30 Routing Options 25.Now for the last option on the Network address setup screen, press Advanced pulldown button. As illustrated in Figure 4-31, you can configure: Figure 4-31 Advanced network configuration options a. Hardware Details: This options modifies the kernel and configure the device manually using IO and IRQ parameters. b. DHCP Client options: Enable to configure advanced setting of the DHCP client. c. Detailed Settings: Here you can define the maximum transfer unit (MTU) and the activation type. d. Virtual Aliases: This is the software version of 802.1Q protocol that enables to have multiple aliases and IP addresses from different networks in the same virtual device. Figure 4-32 shows how to add different IP address using the same device. Chapter 4. Linux installation 135

150 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-32 Advanced Network Configuration - Virtual Aliases 26.Pressing OK on the virtual aliases screen, Network cards configuration overview screen is displayed as illustrated in Figure Click Finish to end the Advanced network configuration. Figure 4-33 Network cards configuration Overview IP aliases are used often for services which are IP based (e.g. you want to host multiple FTP servers on single Linux installation). 136 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

151 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm 27.You will get back to Network address setup screen as illustrated in Figure 4-27 on page 133. Click Next to get the Remote Administration screen as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-34 Remote Administration Choose Allow Remote Administration if you want to enable graphic administration through VNC. This utility enables a direct graphical login when you connect to the VNC server. Click Finish. 28.Now the network configuration is done. as illustrated in Figure 4-35 you can test your network configuration with a connection to internet if the partition's network address has been exposed to the internet; otherwise if the network that Linux is on is a private network the test will fail. Select Yes button to download the latest release notes or check in for new updates and click on Next. Chapter 4. Linux installation 137

152 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-35 Test Internet Connection Note: If the test connection shows you any available patches, you need to login with your Patch Support Database (PSDB) account when prompted. Then you can choose to manually select the patches to install, configure the system to automatically update in the future and being the patch download and installation. 29.Next, we configure the services for security and authentication as illustrated in Figure First, we configure the CA (Certification Authority). This option is useful if you want to configure security services using Apache. Second, we configure OpenLDAP that is useful for user authentication. Click Next to choose the user authentication. 138 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

153 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-36 Service Configuration 30.In Figure 4-37 you can choose the method that you want to authenticate users. We use LDAP method. Select LDAP radio button and click Next. Figure 4-37 User Authentication Method For authentication you have this three options: Chapter 4. Linux installation 139

154 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am a. NIS: Also known as Network Information System is a service designed to provide a distributed database system for common configuration files. It was formerly known as Sun Yellow Pages (YP). A NIS server contains data files called maps. These maps are owned by the NIS master and can only be updated by the master. There are NIS slave servers that replicate from the master. NIS creates a map of a password file kept on the NIS master server. This will allow users to log in to NIS clients without having to maintain an account on each system. Centralized administration is a key benefit of using NIS. b. LDAP: Also known as Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. It is a modern and flexible way of having distributed user accounts. Also, integration of LDAP with other services is better than integration support for NIS. c. Local (/etc/passwd): Is the default. In this place Linux save the users, passwords and groups. the password in this file are encrypted. 31.LDAP Client Configuration as illustrated in Figure 4-38 appears. Click Next to Add new users. Figure 4-38 LDAP Client Configuration 32.On Figure 4-39 we see an example of a user creation. In Our scenario that user is one entry in LDAP. Choose User Management if you want to configure this user to be a part of various groups. 140 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

155 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-39 Add a new LDAP User 33.Click Next to see the Release notes and then another Next to see other Hardware Configuration as illustrated in Figure In our scenario we do not have printers connected to our system so we choose Skip Configuration. Figure 4-40 Other Hardware Configuration 34.Finally, when you click Next, a screen shown as in Figure 4-41 appears. This panel confirms the completion of the installation. Click Finish. If you want to configure another Linux Services, you can check on Start YaST Control Center at this time. Chapter 4. Linux installation 141

156 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-41 Installation Completed 35.Now, you can test your installation. Start the VNC Client to get the screen as illustrated in Figure 4-42 to connect to your Linux server. Figure 4-42 SLES 9- Login Window Log on as root or as the user that you created via the installation wizard. With this step we finish our procedure of Graphical Installation. 142 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

157 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Note: Install Linux DynamicRM and ServiceRM RPMS for dynamic add/remove utility and shutdown linux partition proper way from i5/os and HMC as described on Section 4.6, Post installation steps: Linux DynamicRM and error log analysis RPMs on page SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 installation using HMC terminal So far, we have seen the way of installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 using GUI mode. This section describes the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 installation method using the text mode. For installation SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 using the text mode, make sure you have correct value for IPL parameter as described in Section 4.1.2, Setting the NWSD parameters for initial Linux installation on page On 5250 command entry screen, type: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) CFGD(LINUXI5) Then vary on NWSD by taking Option 1 as illustrated in Figure Position to..... Work with Configuration Status Starting characters MARIAT 07/29/04 21:43:42 Type options, press Enter. 1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 8=Work with description 9=Display mode status 13=Work with APPN status... Opt Description Status Job LINUXI5 VARIED OFF Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F23=More options F24=More keys Bottom Figure 4-43 Work with Configuration Status - Vary On NWSD Check if the status goes into VARY ON by pressing F5. Chapter 4. Linux installation 143

158 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Note: If you cannot vary on partition, check if you configured specific partition in SCSI server configuration on i5os side in HMC. Option Any remote partition and slot can connect is not supported for varying on from i5/os side as illustrated in Figure 3-42 on page 77. Also, newly created partition should be activated at least once from HMC which is done in Figure 3-50 on page On the HMC main menu, select Server and Partition Server Management. Then choose the Linux partition, right click on it and select Open Terminal Window as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-44 System Manager - Opening terminal window 144 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

159 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm 3. Then the partition starts to boot as illustrated in Figure IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM 1 = SMS Menu 5 = Default Boot List 8 = Open Firmware Prompt 6 = Stored Boot List memory keyboard network scsi speaker Figure 4-45 Booting Partition 4. When the installation program and kernel are loaded, a screen as illustrated in Figure 4-46 appears. Select option 4 xterm for that terminal type that works best in the HMC Console. Chapter 4. Linux installation 145

160 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am >>> SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 9 installation program v (c) SU SE LINUX AG <<< Starting hardware detection... Searching for info file... Loading data into RAM disk... (56660 kb)... creating device nodes... done integrating the shared objects of the installation system... starting syslog (messages are logged to /dev/tty4)... starting klogd... integrating kernel modules of the installation system... starting yast... What type of terminal do you have? 1) VT100 2) VT102 3) VT220 4) X Terminal Emulator (xterm) 5) X Terminal Emulator (xterm-vt220) 6) X Terminal Emulator (xterm-sun) 7) screen session 8) Linux VGA or Framebuffer Console 9) Other Type the number of your choice and press Return:4 Figure 4-46 Selecting terminal 5. Then the YaST installation wizard appears as illustrated in Figure Accept the agreement to continue the installation. Note: The installation wizard is the same as we see in GUI mode installation. We will cover all the procedure just to have all in a complete content. Figure 4-47 YaST installation wizard - License Agreement 146 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

161 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Note: Use the TAB key to move around the option screen. 6. Select the language of your Linux operation system as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-48 YAST Installation Wizard - Language 7. Then an error (Figure 4-49) appears on screen. Click OK to continue. Note: This error is explained in the graphical installation procedure in step 9 on page 126. Figure 4-49 YAST Installation - Error partitioning /dev/sdb 8. On Figure 4-50 change or view details about the installation as Keyboard layout, Language, the Partitioning, Software, the Time Zone and Runlevel. Chapter 4. Linux installation 147

162 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-50 YAST Installation - Installation Settings 9. Click Enter over Accept option a confirmation message appears, if your are sure about your option Click enter over Yes, Install as we illustrate in Figure Figure 4-51 YAST Installation - Committing settings 10.At this moment the installation starts, change the CD if is necessary. This case is illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

163 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-52 YAST Installation - Changing source media Note: If you are installing from Virtual CD you may have to press the OK button twice after inserting the second CD. 11.When the installation finish the partition reboots. As well as graphical installation you have to change the NWSD to boot from NWSSTG. this procedure is explained in Figure 4-21 on page 130. Remember to shutdown the partition before change NWSD. 12.Then activate the partition as well as we explain in the beginning of this chapter. The console terminal appears again as we shown in Figure Figure 4-53 YAST Installation - Configuring System Administrator 13.Insert a password for user root. Click next to start the network configuration as we illustrate on Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 149

164 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-54 YAST Installation - Network Configuration Note: In text mode, the installation wizard do not have any information about virtual ethernet IP configuration. In graphical installation when you configure the VNC connection this parameters are configured automatically as we showed in Figure 4-11 on page 123 and in Figure 4-24 on page Press enter to configure the Network interface. the Network cards configuration window. 15.Use the TAB key to select Already configured devices and then highlight the change option as we illustrate in Figure Figure 4-55 YAST Installation - Network cards configuration 16.On the Network cards configuration overview, select the device that you want to configure. Then highlight and enter the Edit option as we illustrate in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

165 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-56 YAST Installation - Network cards configuration overview 17.Change the setup method if your environment requires it. In our scenario we use static IP address as we shown in Figure Highlight the Host name and name servers option to configure the name server and the domain information. Figure 4-57 YAST Installation - Network address setup 18.Change the host name and the domain according to your network configuration. Figure 4-58 shows an example to how to do it. Chapter 4. Linux installation 151

166 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-58 YAST Installation - Host name and server configuration 19.Press enter over Ok, then select routing as we shown in Figure Figure 4-59 YAST Installation - Routing 20.Insert the IP address of your default gateway and if you desired enable IP Forwarding as we illustrate in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

167 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-60 YAST Installation - Routing configuration 21.Enter over Ok an then over Next as we shown in Figure 4-61 Figure 4-61 YAST Installation - Network address setup 22.Then press enter over finish to accept the configuration that you make over this device as we shown in Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 153

168 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-62 YAST Installation - Network cards configuration overview 23.In this example we do not want to configure VNC remote configuration. Click Enter over Next as we illustrate in Figure Figure 4-63 YAST Installation - Network Configuration 24.Then Figure 4-64 Test Internet Connection is displayed, select the option that you desired and press Enter over Next to continue. 154 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

169 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-64 YAST Installation - Test internet Connection 25.In this scenario we skip the service configuration as we show in Figure Press Enter over Next to continue. Figure 4-65 YAST Installation - Service Configuration 26.For user authentication method, we choose Local in this scenario as illustrated in Figure We explain the other methods on Figure 4-37 on page 139. Chapter 4. Linux installation 155

170 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-66 YAST Installation - User authentication method 27.Then write down a new user that you want to create as we shown in Figure Figure 4-67 YAST Installation - Add New Local User 28.Click Enter over Next. Figure 4-68 Release Notes is displayed. 156 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

171 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-68 YAST Installation - Release Notes 29.Click over Next. Figure 4-69 is displayed. Skip this option if you do not want to configure CUPS services. Figure 4-69 YAST Installation - Hardware Configuration 30.Click Enter over Next. Then click over Finish to end the installation as is illustrated on Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 157

172 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-70 YAST Installation - Installation Completed 31.Then the system reboots itself as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-71 Logging on the system This completes SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Service Pack 1 installation. Note: Install Linux DynamicRM and ServiceRM RPMS for dynamic add/remove utility and shutdown linux partition proper way from i5/os and HMC as described on Section 4.6, Post installation steps: Linux DynamicRM and error log analysis RPMs on page Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 installation using GUI mode Like SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9, we can install Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 either using GUI mode or text mode. This section describes Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4installation steps using GUI mode. 158 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

173 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm 1. Establish a connection through HMC virtual console or telnet to i5/os s 2301 port. In our case, we ll connect to i5/os s 2301 port using Putty. It gives you the list of guest partitions created in the system. Select the correct partition ID. In our example, as illustrated in Figure 4-72, we only have one guest partition with the partition ID of 3. We choose it. Then log on using the service tools user profile with remote panel key authority' granted. OS/400 Guest Partition Consoles 3: Linux(V4-C6/V3-C0) Enter the console partition number: 3 Linux: Enter OS/400 service tools userid: LNXUSR Linux: Enter OS/400 service tools password: Linux: Console connecting... Linux: Console connected. Figure 4-72 Telnet session to server using port 2301 When you see the message such as Linux: Console connected. as illustrated as the last line of the screen in Figure 4-72, leave this session as it is. We need to activate NWSD and related Linux partition to get the console screen as illustrated in Figure Note: For virtual console correctly working, you need to complete two previous steps: a. You need to create a service tools user profile as described in Section, Creating a Service Tools User Profile on page 93. b. You need to create a virtual serial adapter with client type as described in Figure 3-53 on page 85. c. Virtual console and Power control described on Section 2.2, Power control and console options on page On 5250 command entry screen, type: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) CFGD(LINUXI5) Then vary on NWSD by taking Option 1 as illustrated in Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 159

174 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Position to..... Work with Configuration Status Starting characters MARIAT 07/29/04 21:43:42 Type options, press Enter. 1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 8=Work with description 9=Display mode status 13=Work with APPN status... Opt Description Status Job LINUXI5 VARIED OFF Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F23=More options F24=More keys Bottom Figure 4-73 Work with Configuration Status - Vary On NWSD Check if the status goes into VARY ON by pressing F5. Note: If you cannot vary on partition, check if you configured specific partition in SCSI server configuration on i5os side in HMC. Option Any remote partition and slot can connect is not supported for varying on from i5/os side as illustrated in Figure 3-42 on page 77. Also, newly created partition should be activated at least once from HMC which is done in Figure 3-50 on page When vary on on NWSD, the telnet session to i5/os partition as illustrated in Figure 4-72 changes to a console session to a Linux partition as illustrated in Figure This particular screen shows the Hardware recognition process has been initiated. 160 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

175 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM 1 = SMS Menu 5 = Default Boot List 8 = Open Firmware Prompt 6 = Stored Boot List memory keyboard network scsi speaker Figure 4-74 Partition Booting - Hardware recognition 4. Now the kernel is being loaded to the Linux partition. The installation wizard prompts the question if we want to test CD media. It is recommended to test CD media before your first Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 installation, otherwise you can choose Skip to skip media check as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-75 Installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 5. Choose English as illustrated in Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 161

176 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-76 Language dialog in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 6. The installation wizard prompts the questions including the IP addresses and netmask info as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-77 Configure TCP/IP dialog in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 7. Then the installation wizard gives us the instructions of how to start the graphical environment using VNC as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-78 Installation Wizard - VNC connection parameters 8. Now open your VNC Client and log in to the VNC Server running in Linux partition as illustrated in Figure For more information about VNC, check Section, VNC on page 21. As we are using NAT, do not use the IP address shown on Linux console. 162 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

177 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Instead, use the IP address of the external TCP/IP interface of your i5/os partition which is configured for the virtual LAN as described in Section, Method 3: Network Address Translator on page 114. NAT function in i5/os will translate this IP address into the Linux partition s virtual ethernet interface address. Figure 4-79 VNC Client - Connection details Then the VNC Client prompts for the password. This password is the one that you defined in the NWSD in our example ch33se. Graphical installation wizard appears as illustrated in Figure Click Next. Figure 4-80 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 - Installation welcome screen Note: Default (automatically) partition schema for RedHat4 is LVM. 9. Choose Automatically partition, select Remove all partitions on this system, click Next as illustrated in Figure Confirm partition setup clicking on OK button. Chapter 4. Linux installation 163

178 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-81 Partition setup 10.Installation wizard shows paritition setup. Confirm partition setup as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-82 Partition confirmation 11.Enter network device information as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

179 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-83 Network devices 12.We can select whether we want to use firewall and what services will remain unfirewalled after installation. In our case, select Enable firewall, check Remote Login (SSH) and click Next as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-84 Firewall configuration Chapter 4. Linux installation 165

180 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Note: If the partition is in private protected network and you re unsure what ports you ll need, you can select No firewall and you can also disable SELinux. After you determine what ports you need and if SELinux is safe option for your applications, you can activate firewall and SELinux later using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 configuration tools. 13.Choose English (USA) as default language for the system and click Next. Select corresponding time zone as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-85 Time zone configuration 14.Enter root password as illustrated in Figure 4-86, in our example vlatk0sg and click Next. Figure 4-86 Root password configuration 15.You can select Customize software packages to be installed and then you can choose individual packages you want to install (for experienced Linux users). In our case we ll select Install default software packages as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

181 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm [ Figure 4-87 Package selection 16.Click Next to start installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4. Click Next and click Continue as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-88 Required Install Media 17.If you are installing using CDs, the installation wizard prompts the screen asking for next CD as illustrated in Figure Insert required CD and click OK to continue as illustrated in Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 167

182 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-89 Change CDROM Note: If you are installing from virtual CD you may have to press the OK button on Error dialog after inserting the second CD. 18.When installation is completed, click Reboot as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-90 Installation complete 19.When the load is done the installation wizard automatically reboots the partition. When you get the screen as illustrated in Figure 4-91 on your virtual console, you need to shutdown the Linux partition from the i5/os side. 168 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

183 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure 4-91 Installation reboot 20.To shutdown the Linux partition from the i5/os side, type: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) CFGD(LINUXI5) where, in our example, CFGD parameter is LINUXI5. Choose option 2 to shutdown the partition. Wait until you see a Vary Off in the status column. 21.Then choose option 8 to work with description. In the Work with Network Server Description window, choose option 2 to change the IPL source, IPL stream file and IPL parameters as we illustrated in Figure We make these changes so that the system will load from the installed source rather than the initial installation media such as CDs. Type choices, press Enter. Change Network Server Desc (CHGNWSD) TCP/IP local domain name.... *SYS TCP/IP name server system... *SYS + for more values Restricted device resources.. *NONE Name, *SAME, *NONE, *ALL... + for more values Synchronize date and time... *NO *SAME, *TYPE, *YES, *NO IPL source *NWSSTG a *SAME, *NWSSTG, *PANEL... IPL stream file *SAME b IPL parameters *NONE c More... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys Figure 4-92 Changing IPL Parameters a. IPL source: This parameter defines where the kernel is located that the server will be booted. Now we need to change this value from *STMF to *NWSSTG for the initial load Chapter 4. Linux installation 169

184 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am is done. Now the boot source resides in the virtual disk associated with the NWSD and normal system boot will take place. b. IPL stream file: This parameter is only valid when IPL source parameter is set with *STMF. Now the value for IPL source parameter is *NWSSTG. Therefore, whatever the value this parameter might have, it is ignored. c. IPL parameters: Specifies a string of characters that will be passed to the load image at IPL time. It consists of commands or configuration information for the guest operating system. Specify a string of up to 256 characters containing the IPL parameters to be passed to the load image. In case of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4, you give the value of *NONE. 22.Start the Linux partition. Type: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) CFGD(LINUXI5) Then choose option 1 to Vary on the partition. In the telnet session the message changes as illustrated in Figure Figure 4-93 Setup Agent 23.System is ready for action as is showed in Figure Login as root user and with password you entered during installation. Figure 4-94 Logging on the system This completes Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 installation. 170 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

185 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Note: Install Linux DynamicRM and ServiceRM RPMS for dynamic add/remove utility and shutdown linux partition proper way from i5/os and HMC as described on Section 4.6, Post installation steps: Linux DynamicRM and error log analysis RPMs on page Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 installation using HMC terminal This section describes Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 installation method using the text mode. 1. On 5250 command entry screen, type: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) CFGD(LINUXI5) Then vary on NWSD by taking Option 1 as illustrated in Figure Position to..... Work with Configuration Status Starting characters MARIAT 07/29/04 21:43:42 Type options, press Enter. 1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 8=Work with description 9=Display mode status 13=Work with APPN status... Opt Description Status Job LINUXI5 VARIED OFF Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F23=More options F24=More keys Bottom Figure 4-95 Work with Configuration Status - Vary On NWSD Check if the status goes into VARY ON by pressing F5. Note: If you cannot vary on partition, check if you configured specific partition in SCSI server configuration on i5os side in HMC. Option Any remote partition and slot can connect is not supported for varying on from i5/os side as illustrated in Figure 3-42 on page 77. Also, newly created partition should be activated at least once from HMC which is done in Figure 3-50 on page On the HMC main menu, select Server and Partition Server Management. Then choose the Linux partition, right click on it and select Open Terminal Window as illustrated in Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 171

186 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 4-96 System Manager - Activating Partition 3. Then the partition starts to boot as illustrated in Figure IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM 1 = SMS Menu 5 = Default Boot List 8 = Open Firmware Prompt 6 = Stored Boot List memory keyboard network scsi speaker Figure 4-97 Booting Partition Note: The installation wizard is the same as we see in GUI mode installation. We will cover all the procedure just to have all in a complete content. 172 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

187 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm 4. When the installation program and kernel are loaded, a screen as illustrated in Figure 4-98 appears. Choose OK, Click Enter over Test to begin testing of the installation media. Note: Use the TAB key to move around the option screen. Welcome to Red Hat Enterprise Linux CD Found To begin testing the CD media before installation press OK. Choose Skip to skip the media test and start the installation OK Skip Figure 4-98 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 welcome screen 5. If media is valid, you will see screen as illustrated in Figure Click OK, then click Continue to proceed with installation. Chapter 4. Linux installation 173

188 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Welcome to Red Hat Enterprise Linux Media Check Result The media check of the image: Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 disc 1 is complete, and the result is: PASS. It is OK to install from this media OK <Tab>/<A n Figure 4-99 Media check result 6. Click OK on welcome screen and then select the language of your Linux operation system as illustrated in Figure Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (C) 2004 Red Hat, Inc. Figure Language selection Language Selection What language would you like to use during the installation process? Catalan # Chinese(Simplified) # Chinese(Traditional) # Croatian # Czech # Danish # Dutch # English # OK Back <Tab>/<Alt-Tab> between elements <Space> selects <F12> next screen 174 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

189 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm 7. Choose Automatically partition, select Remove all partitions on this system, click OK as illustrated in Figure Confirm partition setup clicking on OK button. Note: Default (automatically) partition schema for RedHat4 is LVM. Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (C) 2004 Red Hat, Inc Automatic Partitioning Before automatic partitioning can be set up by the installation program, you must choose how to use the space on your hard drives. Remove all Linux partitions on this system Remove all partitions on this system Keep all partitions and use existing free space Which drive(s) do you want to use for this installation? [*] sda # # # OK Back <Tab>/<Alt-Tab> between elements <Space> selects <F12> next screen Figure Automatic Partitioning 8. Installation wizard shows paritition setup. Confirm partition setup clicking on OK as illustrated in Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 175

190 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (C) 2004 Red Hat, Inc Partitioning Device Start End Size Type Mount Point VG VolGroup M VolGroup # LV LogVol M ext3 / # LV LogVol M swap # /dev/sda # sda M PPC PReP B # sda M ext3 /boot # sda M physical v # # # # New Edit Delete RAID OK Back F1-Help F2-New F3-Edit F4-Delete F5-Reset F12-OK Figure Partition confirmation 9. Enter network device information as illustrated in Figure Enter your default gateway(in our example: ) and name servers (in our example: ). Choose manually and enter host name of linux partition. Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (C) 2004 Red Hat, Inc Network Configuration for eth Network Device: eth0 [ ] Configure using DHCP [*] Activate on boot IP Address Netmask OK Back <Tab>/<Alt-Tab> between elements <Space> selects <F12> next screen Figure Network configuration 176 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

191 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm 10.We can select whether we want to use firewall and what services will remain unfirewalled after installation. In our case, select Enable firewall and choose Customize. Check Remote Login (SSH) and click OK as illustrated in Figure Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (C) 2004 Red Hat, Inc Customize Firewall Configuration With a firewall, you may wish to allow access to specific services on your computer from others. Allow access to which services? Allow incoming: [*] Remote Login (SSH) [ ] Web Server (HTTP, HTTPS) [ ] File Transfer (FTP) [ ] Mail Server (SMTP) OK <Tab>/<Alt-Tab> between elements <Space> selects <F12> next screen Figure Firewall configuration Note: If the partition is in private protected network and you re unsure what ports you ll need, you can select No firewall and you can also disable SELinux. After you determine what ports you need and if SELinux is safe option for your applications, you can activate firewall and SELinux later using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 configuration tools. 11.Choose Activate and click OK to activate Security Enhached Linux 12.Choose English (USA) as default language for the system and click OK. Select corresponding time zone as illustrated in Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 177

192 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (C) 2004 Red Hat, Inc Time Zone Selection What time zone are you located in? [ ] System clock uses UTC US/Aleutian # US/Arizona # US/Central # US/East-Indiana # US/Eastern # OK Back <Tab>/<Alt-Tab> between elements <Space> selects <F12> next screen Figure Time zone configuration 13.Enter root password, in our example vlatk0sg. Click OK as illustrated in Figure Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (C) 2004 Red Hat, Inc Root Password Pick a root password. You must type it twice to ensure you know what it is and didn't make a mistake in typing. Remember that the root password is a critical part of system security! Password: ******** Password (confirm): ******** OK Back <Tab>/<Alt-Tab> between elements <Space> selects <F12> next screen Figure Root password configuration 178 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

193 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm 14.You can select Customize software packages to be installed and then you can choose packages to be installed individually (for experienced Linux users). In our case we ll select Install default software packages as illustrated in Figure [ Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (C) 2004 Red Hat, Inc Package Defaults The default installation environment includes our recommended package selection. After installation, additional software can be added or removed using the 'system-config-packages' tool. However Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS ships with many more applications, and you may customize the selection of software installed if you want. [ ] Customize software selection OK Back <Tab>/<Alt-Tab> between elements <Space> selects <F12> next screen Figure Package selection 15.Click OK to start installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 and then click Continue. 16.If you are installing using CDs, the installation wizard prompts the screen asking for next CD as illustrated in Figure Insert required CD and click OK to continue as illustrated in Figure Chapter 4. Linux installation 179

194 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (C) 2004 Red Hat, Inc Package Installation Name : hwdata el-1-noarch Size Change CDROM Summar data Please insert Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS disc 2 to continue OK Time Total Compl Remai <Tab>/<Alt-Tab> between elements <Space> selects <F12> next screen Figure Change media Note: If you are installing from virtual CD you may have to press the OK button on Error dialog after inserting the second CD. 17.When installation is completed, click Reboot as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

195 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (C) 2004 Red Hat, Inc Complete Congratulations, your Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS installation is complete. Remove any installation media (diskettes or CD-ROMs) used during the installation process and press <Enter> to reboot your system Reboot Figure Installation complete <Enter> to reboot 18.When the load is done the installation wizard automatically reboots the partition. When you get the screen as illustrated in Figure on your virtual console, you need to shutdown the Linux partition from the i5/os side. sending termination signals...done sending kill signals...done disabling swap... /dev/mapper/volgroup00-logvol01 unmounting filesystems... /mnt/runtime done disabling /dev/loop0 /proc done /dev/pts done /sys done /tmp/ramfs done /selinux done /mnt/sysimage/boot done /mnt/sysimage/proc done /mnt/sysimage/sys done /mnt/sysimage/selinux done /mnt/sysimage/dev done /mnt/sysimage done rebooting system Restarting system. Figure Reboot 19.To shutdown the Linux partition from the i5/os side, type: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) CFGD(LINUXI5) Chapter 4. Linux installation 181

196 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am where, in our example, CFGD parameter is LINUXI5. Choose option 2 to shutdown the partition. Wait until you see a Vary Off in the status column. 20.Then choose option 8 to work with description. In the Work with Network Server Description window, choose option 2 to change the IPL source, IPL stream file and IPL parameters as we illustrated in Figure We make these changes so that the system will load from the installed source rather than the initial installation media such as CDs. Type choices, press Enter. Change Network Server Desc (CHGNWSD) TCP/IP local domain name.... *SYS TCP/IP name server system... *SYS + for more values Restricted device resources.. *NONE Name, *SAME, *NONE, *ALL... + for more values Synchronize date and time... *NO *SAME, *TYPE, *YES, *NO IPL source *NWSSTG a *SAME, *NWSSTG, *PANEL... IPL stream file *SAME b IPL parameters *NONE c More... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys Figure Changing IPL Parameters a. IPL source: This parameter defines where the kernel is located that the server will be booted. Now we need to change this value from *STMF to *NWSSTG for the initial load is done. Now the boot source resides in the virtual disk associated with the NWSD and normal system boot will take place. b. IPL stream file: This parameter is only valid when IPL source parameter is set with *STMF. Now the value for IPL source parameter is *NWSSTG. Therefore, whatever the value this parameter might have, it is ignored. c. IPL parameters: Specifies a string of characters that will be passed to the load image at IPL time. It consists of commands or configuration information for the guest operating system. Specify a string of up to 256 characters containing the IPL parameters to be passed to the load image. In case of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4, you give the value of *NONE. 21.Start the Linux partition. Type: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) CFGD(LINUXI5) Then choose option 1 to Vary on the partition. 22.System is ready for action as is showed in Figure Login as root user and with password you entered during installation. 182 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

197 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm [ OK ] Starting system message bus: [ OK ] Starting cups-config-daemon: [ OK ] Starting HAL daemon: [ OK ] Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS release 4 (Nahant) Kernel EL on an ppc64 linuxi5.rchland.ibm.com login: Figure Logging on the system This completes Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 installation. Note: Install Linux DynamicRM and ServiceRM RPMS for dynamic add/remove utility and shutdown linux partition proper way from i5/os and HMC as described on Section 4.6, Post installation steps: Linux DynamicRM and error log analysis RPMs on page Post installation steps: Linux DynamicRM and error log analysis RPMs RPM is a package manager that can be used to build, install, query, verify, update and uninstall individual software packages. A package consists of files and package information including name, version and description. Some RPMs are required to take advantage of the full functionality of Linux on POWER5. These RPMs are available at the following website: From their home page, click on RPMs for both SUSE and Red Hat Linux are available at this website DynamicRM and ServiceRM RPMs This group of RPMs are required to enable Dynamic LPAR functionality and to properly power off their Linux logical partitions from the HMC. Check if HMC is successfully communicating with the logical partition via RMC by getting shutdown dialog in HMC. If some options are not selectable in the shutdown dialog as illustrated in Figure 4-113, you need to install mentioned RPMs. Chapter 4. Linux installation 183

198 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure HMC partition shutdown dialog without RMC communication The RMC framework must be installed first. This provides the channel for communication between the HMC and the Linux logical partition. Then, the DynamicRM and ServiceRM RPMs can be installed. These RPMs perform the actions which the HMC requests and send serviceable events to the service focal point on the HMC. Note: You may need to install some prerequisites as rdist and compat-libstdc++ from your linux installation media. The RPMs must be installed in the following order: 1. src 2. rsct.core.utils 3. rsct.core 4. csm.core 5. csm.client 6. devices.chrp.base.servicerm 7. DynamicRM To verify the HMC can properly communicate with the logical partition using RMC, right click on the logical partition. Click Shut Down Partition. If all the options are selectable as illustrated in Figure 4-114, then the HMC is successfully communicating with the logical partition via RMC. 184 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

199 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chins.fm Figure HMC partition shutdown dialog with RMC communication Error log analysis and RTAS This second group of RPMs are the platform error log analysis tools and rtas_errd daemon. These RPMs interpret and act upon RTAS messages which are sent by the POWER5 hardware and hypervisor. The installation of these RPMs is required if you wish to properly shutdown your logical partition using the NWSD. Varying off the NWSD causes a message to be sent by the hypervisor to the kernel. When the rtas_errd daemon is running, it catches this message and performs a shutdown of the Linux logical partition. The RPMs required are: librtas diagela Chapter 4. Linux installation 185

200 6388chins.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 186 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

201 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm 5 Chapter 5. Administration and operations This chapter discusses the administration and operation topics of the Linux server including: Starting and stopping Linux partition Linux partition with virtual I/O via NWSD Linux partition with direct I/O Checking the Linux partition resources From HMC From Linux side Webmin discussion Installation guide of Webmin Common administration task examples using Webmin i5/os side tasks for Linux setting Backup and restore of Linux partition Backup and restore strategy i5/os side backup and restore Linux side backup and restore HMC configuration backup and restore Troubleshooting Copyright IBM Corp All rights reserved. 187

202 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 5.1 Starting and stopping Linux partition As we discuss on Power control and console options on page 36, there are four ways to power control of the Linux partition. This section provides the information on which of these four options is the most recommended option Linux partition with virtual I/O via NWSD As title says, when we have virtual I/O resources the best way to startup the Linux partition is the vary on option on the NWSD as we illustrated on Figure 5-1. Position to..... Work with Configuration Status Starting characters MARIAT 07/29/04 21:43:42 Type options, press Enter. 1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 8=Work with description 9=Display mode status 13=Work with APPN status... Opt Description Status Job LINUXI5 VARIED OFF Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F23=More options F24=More keys Bottom Figure 5-1 Starting Linux Partition from NWSD The main reason why this is the best option is because it is the way to verify if all the virtual resources are available for the power on. In i5 all the virtual devices comes from i5/os. To verify that your configuration can start up from NWSD option check: 1. On your HMC in Navigation Area select Server and Partition Server Management. Then do a right click over the partition profile and select Properties as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

203 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-2 Partition profile - properties 2. Over properties window select on Power Controlling tab as illustrated in Figure 5-3. Verify that the power partition controlling is the i5/os partition that is hosting the resources to the Linux partition. Figure 5-3 Power controlling option 3. For varying on of a NWSD the Power control choice on the NWSD needs to be set on *YES. To check this, open a 5250 emulation and execute the following command: CHGNWSD (LINUXI5) A NWSD example is shown in Figure 5-4. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 189

204 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Type choices, press Enter. Change Network Server Desc (CHGNWSD) Power control *YES *YES, *NO Text 'description' > 'Linux i5' 9 Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys Figure 5-4 CHGNWSD - Power control verification With this verification, you know that you can start and stop your Linux partition from NWSD. Note: For shutdown, varying off the NWSD sends to the Linux a shutdown -h now instruction. It guarantees that the power off process shutdown all the Linux services and resources correctly. We highly recommend do not try the immed option of the vary off or shutdown a hosted partition from the Hardware Management Console. It can lead a disk restore or software programs problems Linux partition with direct I/O Partitions with native I/O resources as real disk drives and controllers will not need a NWSD to boot. These types of partition configurations can be started from the HMC as we illustrated on Figure 5-5. Figure 5-5 HMC - Partition activation Note: To shutdown the partition we recommend to execute the shutdown -h now Linux instruction power off the Linux partition correctly. We highly recommend do not try the immed option of shutdown on the HMC It can lead a disk restore or software programs problems. 190 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

205 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm 5.2 Checking Linux partition resources We need to know the current resource utilization of the Linux partitions for proper management of the resources. Those resources can be processors, memory utilization, process jobs. This section explains how to check the Linux resources from HMC and from Linux OS From HMC On runtime you can monitor your Linux partitions from HMC. Here you can see the processors and memory usage and the I/O devices that are attached to the partition. On HMC right click over partition and select Properties as illustrated in Figure 5-6. Figure 5-6 HMC - Partition properties Over the partition properties window, select the Hardware tab. In this window select the I/O tab as illustrated in Figure 5-7. Under the I/O tab you can see the resources that are used for the Logical partition. In our case the Linux partition has attached an ethernet adapter as Physical I/O. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 191

206 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-7 Partition properties - Hardware I/O Select the Processors and Memory tab as illustrated on Figure 5-8. This tab shows the resource definition as well as the current resource allocation. 192 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

207 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-8 Partition properties - Hardware processors and memory From Linux OS There are a number of tools that exist in Linux for finding out the current resource allocation or utilization. In this section we will briefly cover top vmstat free iostat The top command The top command provides a dynamic real-time view of a running system. It can display system summary information as well as a list of tasks currently being managed by the Linux kernel. The types of system summary information shown and the types, order and size of information displayed for tasks are all user configurable and that configuration can be made persistent across restarts. The program provides a limited interactive interface for process manipulation as well as a much more extensive interface for personal configuration. When operating top, the two most important keys are h or? for help and q key for quit. Alternatively, you could use the traditional interrupt key Ctrl+C when you are done. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 193

208 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am To start top, run in any Linux emulation the following command: linux:~ # top As illustrated in Figure 5-9, the top command is composed for the following screen areas: 1. Summary area: The summary area gives a brief status of the system showing the quantity of tasks, the CPU, memory and swap utilization. 2. Message/prompt line: Here is the command entry. For more information about the commands you can entry here key h or? for help. 3. Columns header: This file defines the column header. In our example, you see processes by PID (Process ID), user, PR (priority), NI (nice value) that is another type of priority, VIRT (Virtual memory used in the task), RES (non swapped physical memory used), SHR (Shared Memory size), S (Process status), %CPU (CPU usage), %MEM (Memory usage), TIME+ (CPU time), COMMAND (Command line or program name). 4. Task area: In this area every line or file is one independent process. top - 08:51:36 up 13:02, 2 users, load average: 0.00, 0.00, 0.00 } Tasks: 95 total, 1 running, 94 sleeping, 0 stopped, 0 zombie Cpu(s): 0.0% us, 0.0% sy, 0.0% ni, 100.0% id, 0.0% wa, 0.0% hi, 0.0% si 1 Mem: k total, k used, k free, 23408k buffers Swap: k total, 0k used, k free, k cached _ } 2 PID USER PR NI VIRT RES SHR S %CPU %MEM TIME+ COMMAND } root R :02.39 top 1 root S :00.20 init 2 root RT S :00.00 migration/0 } 3 root S :00.00 ksoftirqd/0 4 root RT S :00.00 migration/1 5 root S :00.00 ksoftirqd/1 6 root RT S :00.00 migration/2 7 root S :00.00 ksoftirqd/2 4 8 root RT S :00.00 migration/3 9 root S :00.00 ksoftirqd/3 42 root S :00.00 events/0 43 root S :00.00 events/1 44 root S :00.00 events/2 45 root S :00.00 events/3 46 root S :00.00 kblockd/0 47 root S :00.00 kblockd/1 48 root S :00.00 kblockd/2 Figure 5-9 top command The vmstat command The vmstat command reports information about processes, memory, paging, block IO, traps, and cpu activity. The first report produced gives averages since the last reboot. Additional reports give information on a sampling period of length delay. The process and memory reports are instantaneous in either case. To start vmstat run Linux command as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

209 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm linux:~ # vmstat procs memory swap io system cpu---- r b swpd free buff cache si so bi bo in cs us sy id wa linux:~ # Figure 5-10 vmstat command Execute vmstat -h or man vmstat for further information. The free command The free command displays the total amount of free and used physical and swap memory in the system, as well as the buffers used by the kernel. The shared memory column should be ignored; it is obsolete. To run the free command execute it on a Linux emulator as illustrated in Figure linux:~ # free total used free shared buffers cached Mem: /+ buffers/cache: Swap: linux:~ # Figure 5-11 free command Execute free -h or man free for further information. The iostat command The iostat command is used for monitoring system input/output device loading by observing the time the devices are active in relation to their average transfer rates. The iostat command generates reports that can be used to change system configuration to better balance the input/output load between physical disks. The first report generated by the iostat command provides statistics concerning the time since the system was booted. Note: To run this command it is necessary to install the sysstat package. Refer to your distribution software installer to obtain this package. On Figure 5-12 we illustrate how to execute the iostat on a Linux terminal. This example shows two system reports at interval os two seconds. Each new report contains statistics collected during the interval since the previous report. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 195

210 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am linux:~ # iostat 2 2 Linux pseries64 (linux) 09/08/04 avg-cpu: %user %nice %sys %iowait %idle Device: tps Blk_read/s Blk_wrtn/s Blk_read Blk_wrtn sda sdb sr avg-cpu: %user %nice %sys %iowait %idle Device: tps Blk_read/s Blk_wrtn/s Blk_read Blk_wrtn sda sdb sr linux:~ # Figure 5-12 iostat command 5.3 Linux administration using Webmin This section covers a very useful Linux administration tool of Webmin. The benefits of Webmin include: You can open a Linux administration session from your web browser You do not need to be familiar with Linux commands It is an open source package Webmin installation This section explains how to install Webmin. For general information on Webmin, go: 1. To download Webmin package along with the installation instruction and files, go: to get the screen as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

211 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-13 Webmin download page 2. You download three files: webmin-1.xxx.tar.gz, webmin-1.xxx.tar.gz-sig.asc and jcameron-key.asc (where xxx is the release of Webmin: at the time of writing this redbook, we used the release 150). First file is the Webmin package file itself. The second and third files are Signature and Key package files. They are to validate the integrity of the install package that the installation package file is from the authentic authors and has not been compromised. For jcameron-key.asc file, right click on PGP key as illustrated at the bottom half of the screen Figure 5-13 and click on Save Target As. For webmin-1.xxx.tar.gz-sig.asc file, right click on PGP signature as illustrated at the bottom half of the screen Figure 5-13 and click on Save Target As. You can download these three files to any folder on your PC, such as /temp. Note: The current release of Webmin which is 150 does not support SLES 9. It is expected to be supported from the next release. 3. Copy these files to /usr/local/src directory on Linux on your i5 system. You can use WinSCP tool for this task as illustrated in Figure The benefits of WinSCP are: You can use FTP protocol even FTP server is not configured in your Linux partition. You can use secure FTP transfer such as FTP with TSL. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 197

212 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-14 Webmin source package transferring to Linux on i5 using WinSCP 4. Webmin is written in Perl. Before we start the installation of Webmin, we need to check if your system is ready to run Perl application. a. Open a PuTTY session to your Linux partition and type: rpm -qa grep perl Example 5-1 Installed Perl modules example linuxi5:~ # rpm -qa grep perl perl-uri perl-digest-sha perl-compress-zlib perl perl-netxap perl-mailtools perl-config-crontab perl-io-stringy perl-xml-parser perl-bit-vector perl-parse-recdescent perl-digest-md perl-digest-hmac perl-crypt-smbhash perl-x500-dn perl-mime-tools-5.411a perl-date-calc perl-openssl yast2-perl-bindings perl-64bit perl-archive-zip perl-termreadkey perl-gettext Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

213 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm as illustrated in Example 5-1, we can figure out that Perl is actually installed in your system. But we need perl-net_ssleay module for a secure web communication and that module is not installed. b. We install perl-net_ssleay module using YaST. On Linux command screen, type: yast2 From main YaST menu, choose Software Install and Remove Software and press Enter. On the next screen press Alt-S to search. Search key is perl-net_ssleay. Press Alt-O to start searching. When you get the return screen with perl-net_ssleay found, press Space bar on the perl-net_ssleay line until you see + sign before it as illustrated in visible on Figure Plus sign, + sign, before the module means it is ready to be installed. Figure 5-15 perl-net_ssleay installation c. Then press Alt-A to accept the installation of this module. Insert the right CD when needed. Once installed, choose Alt-Q to quit YaST. 5. Now we are back to Webmin installation step. To install Webmin, we need to know the location of executable file for Perl. Type: whereis perl as illustrated in Example 5-2, we see the file path where the executable files for Perl reside. We need this information for the installation. Example 5-2 Location of executable files for Perl linuxi5:~ # whereis perl perl: /usr/bin/perl /usr/share/man/man1/perl.1.gz 6. Last pre-req step before the actual installation of Webmin source file is to check the integrity of it. We do this by executing a few Linux commands as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 199

214 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am a. Type: cd /usr/local/src to change the directory where we copied three downloaded Webmin installation files. b. Type: gpg --import jcameron-key.asc to import the author s key. Type: gpg --verify webmin tar.gz-sig.asc webmin tar.gz to check the integrity of the Webmin installation source file. We are sure of the integrity by the message, gpg: Good signature from "Jamie Cameron <[email protected]>". linuxi5:~ # cd /usr/local/src linuxi5:/usr/local/src # gpg --import jcameron-key.asc gpg: key 11F63C51: "Jamie Cameron <[email protected]>" imported gpg: Total number processed: 1 gpg: imported: 1 linuxi5:/usr/local/src # gpg --verify webmin tar.gz-sig.asc webmin tar.gz gpg: Signature made Thu Jun 3 18:18: CDT using DSA key ID 11F63C51 gpg: Good signature from "Jamie Cameron <[email protected]>" gpg: checking the trustdb gpg: no ultimately trusted keys found gpg: WARNING: This key is not certified with a trusted signature! gpg: There is no indication that the signature belongs to the owner. Primary key fingerprint: A CE3E 5A41 E2DE 70DF D97A 3AE9 11F6 3C51 Figure 5-16 Checking signature for resource Tip: More about integrity checking, signature keys and related commands you can find on URL: and PGP links here. 7. Now all is prepared to install Webmin. Follow the next commands in Figure 5-17, Figure 5-18 and Figure 5-19 to do it. 200 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

215 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm linuxi5:/usr/local/src # tar -xzf webmin tar.gz linuxi5:/usr/local/src # cd webmin-1.150/ linuxi5:/usr/local/src/webmin #./setup.sh /usr/local/webmin *********************************************************************** * Welcome to the Webmin setup script, version * *********************************************************************** Webmin is a web-based interface that allows Unix-like operating systems and common Unix services to be easily administered. Installing Webmin from /usr/local/src/webmin to /usr/local/webmin... *********************************************************************** Webmin uses separate directories for configuration files and log files. Unless you want to run multiple versions of Webmin at the same time you can just accept the defaults. Config file directory [/etc/webmin]: Log file directory [/var/webmin]: *********************************************************************** Webmin is written entirely in Perl. Please enter the full path to the Perl 5 interpreter on your system. Full path to perl (default /usr/bin/perl): Testing Perl... Perl seems to be installed ok *********************************************************************** For Webmin to work properly, it needs to know which operating system type and version you are running. Please select your system type by entering the number next to it from the list below ) Sun Solaris 2) Caldera OpenLinux es 3) Caldera OpenLinux 4) Redhat Linux 5) Slackware Linux 6) Debian Linux 7) SuSE Linux 8) United Linux 9) Corel Linux 10) TurboLinux 11) Cobalt Linux 12) Mandrake Linux 13) Mandrake Linux Corpo 14) Delix DLD Linux 15) Conectiva Linux 16) ThizLinux Desktop 17) ThizServer 18) MSC Linux 19) MkLinux 20) LinuxPPC 21) XLinux 22) LinuxPL 23) Trustix 24) Cendio LBS Linux 25) Ute Linux 26) Lanthan Linux 27) Yellow Dog Linux 28) Corvus Latinux 29) Immunix Linux 30) Gentoo Linux 31) Lycoris Desktop/LX 32) Secure Linux 33) OpenNA Linux 34) White Dwarf Linux 35) SoL Linux 36) Coherent Technology 37) Playstation Linux 38) Generic Linux 39) FreeBSD 40) OpenBSD 41) NetBSD 42) BSDI 43) HP/UX 44) SGI Irix 45) DEC/Compaq OSF/1 46) IBM AIX 47) SCO UnixWare 48) SCO OpenServer 49) Darwin 50) Mac OS X 51) Mac OS X / OS X Serv 52) Cygwin 53) Sun Java Desktop Sys Operating system: 7 Figure 5-17 Webmin installation - part 1 Chapter 5. Administration and operations 201

216 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Please choose which version of SuSE Linux you are running, by entering the number next to it from the list below ) SuSE Linux 5.1 2) SuSE Linux 5.2 3) SuSE Linux 5.3 4) SuSE Linux 6.0 5) SuSE Linux 6.1 6) SuSE Linux 6.2 7) SuSE Linux 6.3 8) SuSE Linux 6.4 9) SuSE Linux ) SuSE Linux ) SuSE Linux ) SuSE Linux ) SuSE Linux ) SuSE Linux ) SuSE Linux ) SuSE Linux ) SuSE Linux ) SuSE Linux OpenExchange Version: 16 Operating system name: SuSE Linux Operating system version: 9.0 *********************************************************************** Webmin uses its own password protected web server to provide access to the administration programs. The setup script needs to know : - What port to run the web server on. There must not be another web server already using this port. - The login name required to access the web server. - The password required to access the web server. - If the webserver should use SSL (if your system supports it). - Whether to start webmin at boot time. Web server port (default 10000): Login name (default admin): root Login password: Password again: Use SSL (y/n): y Start Webmin at boot time (y/n): y *********************************************************************** Copying files to /usr/local/webmin....done Creating web server config files....done Configuring Webmin to start at boot time.. Created init script /etc/init.d/webmin..done Creating uninstall script /etc/webmin/uninstall.sh....done Changing ownership and permissions....done Running postinstall scripts....done Figure 5-18 Webmin installation - part Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

217 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Attempting to start Webmin mini web server.. Starting Webmin server in /usr/local/webmin..done *********************************************************************** Webmin has been installed and started successfully. Use your web browser to go to and login with the name and password you entered previously. Because Webmin uses SSL for encryption only, the certificate it uses is not signed by one of the recognized CAs such as Verisign. When you first connect to the Webmin server, your browser will ask you if you want to accept the certificate presented, as it does not recognize the CA. Say yes. Figure 5-19 Webmin installation - part 3 8. Now the installation is done. Let s check if everything went OK. Open a web browser session and type: where linux5 is our Linux server name and is the port number for Webmin application. A Webmin logon screen as illustrated in Figure 5-20 appears. Figure 5-20 Webmin logon windows Chapter 5. Administration and operations 203

218 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am This concludes the installation of Webmin Using Webmin for Linux administration tasks Before you start some administration task it is good idea to setup Webmin environment to be most convenient for you. For example, if English isn t your native language use Webmin Change Language and Theme and change Webmin UI language. Viewing and editing files This section explains how to use Webmin to find, view, and edit the files. 1. From the main Webmin menu, select Others File Manager as illustrated in Figure Figure 5-21 Webmin - File manager option 2. You can click on the directory or file of your interest or you can search for a file clicking on Find icon in the navigation bar. Once you find the file of your interest, click on Edit icon for editing as illustrated in Figure You can double click on the file to view the contents but you cannot edit it. 204 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

219 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-22 Webmin - File Manager Security settings This section explains how to use Webmin s navigation bar icons as illustrated in Figure 5-23 for a specific file s security settings:. Info icon: You can view and edit the permission and ownership of the file ACL icon: You can view and edit the Access Control List over the file EXT icon: You can view and edit the extra attributes of the file where some of the attributes are security related. Figure 5-23 Webmin - File Manager - navigation bar Figure 5-24 illustrates the examples of these icons. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 205

220 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-24 Webmin - File Manager - file privileges Managing users and groups Click on Users and Groups icon in System pane to administrate Linux users - Figure Figure 5-25 Webmin - Users and Groups 206 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

221 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm From the opened windows you can create, modify or delete users or groups only by filling the appropriate fields or pressing buttons. Some details about using Webmin you can find in There are many other webmin modules what can be very useful for you. You can find it on URL or from main webmin page you can click on Third-Party Modules icon. Installing these modules you can do by Webmin Webmin Configuration Webmin Modules Install Module. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 207

222 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 5.4 i5/os administration task related Linux setting This section covers the topics of i5/os side administration tasks to properly set Linux environment Invoking DST from HMC Once you install HMC on your eserver i5, the system panel only displays the HMC messages. Normal operations you used to do with the system panel, putting the system in DST (Dedicated Service Tools) mode for example, is not possible any more through system panel. These functions are now available through HMC. So, when would you need to put the system in DST mode? For example, it can happen that you forget the password of DST/SST QSECOFR. Well, if the value for Allow system value security changes option is set to *Yes, then you can execute i5/os command of CHGDSTPWD PASSWORD(*DEFAULT) to set QSECOFR s password back to its default value and you can move on. But if the value for Allow system value security changes option is set to *No, then you need to get the value changed to *Yes and you can do this only from DST panel. For this, you need to put the system in DST mode. This section explains the steps of invoking DST from HMC. 1. First, we open a 5250 screen from HMC. a. On HMC main menu, select Management Environment <host_computer> Server and Partition Server Management, then right click on the i5/os partition you work with and select Open Terminal Window. b. Next screen prompts you for HMC userid and password. Key in with valid set of userid and password. c. Next screen prompts you to select the managed system. In our example, we have only one managed system, therefore select 1. d. Next screen prompts you to select the partition. Select the i5/os partition we are working on. In our example, it is i5os partition. e. You will get an 5250 signon screen. Just leave it without signing on. 2. On HMC main menu, select Management Environment <host_computer> Service Applications Service Focal Point and click on Service Utilities as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

223 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-26 Starting Service Utilities from HMC main menu 3. In Service Utilities window select System Processor as illustrated in Figure Figure 5-27 Selecting system processor 4. From the menu bar, select Selected Operator Panel Service Functions... as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 209

224 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-28 HMC- Service Utilities 5. Select the i5/os partition, i5os in our example. Then select Partition Functions Activate Dedicated Service Tools (21) - OS400 as illustrated in Figure Figure 5-29 HMC - Operator Panel Service Functions 6. Message as illustrated in Figure 5-30 appears. At this point, a DST signon screen shows up on your 5250 terminal session as we left in step e on page Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

225 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-30 DST initialized 7. Now you can change the value for Allow system value security changes option to *Yes from DST panel and move on Configuring directly attached network adapter to Linux partition Network adapter can be either ethernet card or Token-ring card. In majority of the cases, our network runs in ethernet. Therefore, in this section, we use the term network adapter and ethernet card or ethernet adapter interchangeably. You can attach network adapter or ethernet card for that matter to a Linux partition directly. Section 3.2.3, Configuring directly attached network card for Linux partition on page 96 explains how to configure a network adapter for Linux partition. The main difference between that scenario and this one is a matter of dynamic configuration. In this scenario, you need to boot the Linux partition but you do not need to IPL the i5/os partition. In the other scenario, you need to IPL the i5/os partition and activate the Linux partition to take the change effective. Searching for available network adapter If you have a new physical network adapter, or ethernet card, available for your Linux partition, then you may skip this section. This section explains how to find an available network adapter which is already inserted into a system unit. For supported network adapters for Linux on eserver i5, refer to Network adapters on page On a 5250 command entry screen, type: WRKHDWRSC *CMN and take option 5 before the Ethernet Port as illustrated Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 211

226 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-31 Checking availability ethernet card 2. What you need to do here is to find a network adapter which is not being used. As you see in Figure 5-32, if there s no line description attached to the device (*NONE), that device is available. If your first pick has a line description attached, such as ETHLINE, continue this step until you find the one with *NONE. 212 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

227 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-32 Ethernet card available for moving 3. When you find one with *NONE, press F12 and take option 7 to find out the card s location as illustrated in Figure In our example, the location is C4 in CEC which is a system unit, not the expansion tower. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 213

228 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-33 Ethernet card - location Removing ethernet card from i5/os Next task is removing the network adapter from i5/os. 1. From HMC main menu, select Management Environment <host_computer> Server and Partition Server Management and then right-click on partition profile of i5/os partition you work with and select Properties (see Figure 5-34). Figure 5-34 HMC - i5/os Partition profile - Properties 214 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

229 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm 2. Click on Physical I/O panel and in Profile I/O devices find the ethernet card on base case number - bus number - position number, highlight it, press Remove button and then press OK button (see Figure 5-35). Figure 5-35 HMC - remove card from iprofile I/O devices 5/OS 3. Right-click on i5/os partition (not partition profile as before) you work with now and select Dynamic Logical Partitioning Physical Adapter Resources Remove (see Figure 5-36). Chapter 5. Administration and operations 215

230 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-36 HMC-Remove ethernet card - menu 4. Select the adapter you want to remove and press OK button (see Figure 5-37). Figure 5-37 HMC - Remove ethernet card - resource Adding ethernet card to Linux partition 216 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

231 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Next task is adding the network adapter to a Linux partition. 1. If your Linux partition is running, start with this step. When isn t running start with step 5. Right-click on Linux partition to which you want add the ethernet card and select Dynamic Logical Partitioning Physical Adapter Resources Add (see Figure 5-38). Figure 5-38 HMC - Add ethernet card - menu 2. Select the adapter you want to add and press Enter button (see Figure 5-39). Figure 5-39 HMC - Add ethernet card - resource 3. When you see some warning message about No RMC Connection press Continue button. 4. When you now right-click on Linux partition and select Properties you can see this ethernet card in I/O panel (see Figure 5-40). Chapter 5. Administration and operations 217

232 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-40 HMC - Linux partition - Properties 5. Add this resource to required resources after restarting partition. Right-click on partition profile your Linux partition (not partition as before) and select Properties. There select Physical I/O panel and in Managed system I/O devices window select adapter you want to be owned by this partition. Then press Add as required button (see Figure 5-41). 218 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

233 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-41 HMC - Add adapter to partition resources as required 6. Press OK button. 7. Reboot Linux. Use Webmin System Bootup and Shutdown and Reboot System button. 8. After rebooting start PuTTY SSH session and issue the command dmesg, which write out all booting messages. Find there these one which are about ethernet interfaces and find what name was added to new ethernet card (see Figure 5-42). Chapter 5. Administration and operations 219

234 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am drivers/net/ibmveth.c: ibmveth: IBM i/pseries Virtual Ethernet Driver 1.02 vio_register_driver: driver ibmveth registering (drivers/net/ibmveth.c:885): entering ibmveth_probe for UA 0x (drivers/net/ibmveth.c:949 ua: ): 0xc fb26b80 (drivers/net/ibmveth.c:959 ua: ): registering netdev... (drivers/net/ibmveth.c:969 ua: ): registered usbcore: registered new driver usbfs usbcore: registered new driver hub pcnet32.c:v1.30e [email protected] PCI: Enabling device: (0000:48:01.0), cmd 3 pcnet32: PCnet/FAST III 79C973 at 0xcec00, b assigned IRQ 133. eth1: registered as PCnet/FAST III 79C973 PCI: Enabling device: (0000:58:01.0), cmd 3 pcnet32: PCnet/FAST III 79C973 at 0xbec00, b assigned IRQ 137. eth2: registered as PCnet/FAST III 79C973 pcnet32: 2 cards_found. eth1: link up, 100Mbps, full-duplex, lpa 0x41E1 Figure 5-42 Putty - dmesg 9. Open Webmin Networking Network Configuration Network Interfaces and click on Add new interface link. Fill the all needed field for new interface with name founded above (eth2 in our scenario) (see Figure 5-43). Figure 5-43 Webmin - add new interface 10.Press the Create button and you would see new interface up like on Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

235 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-44 Webmin - active interfaces Managing disk space using LVM for Linux on i5 As your data grows, you need to increase the size of your Linux file system. This section, we describe the way to increase the file size by adding new disk. We also do it using Logical Volume Manager (LVM) for the flexibility of future expansion. One of the first file system you need to increase is /home directory. We take the example of increasing /home file system size. Main steps of this task include: Create a new disk, i.e. a new Network Server Storage (NWSSTG), and add it to a Linux partition Save the contents of /home directory and remove it from the current disk Partition the new disk using LVM and mount it to /home directory Restore the backup of /home directory to a new location Understanding virtual SCSI chain All virtual SCSI devices for a Linux partition are defined in a virtual SCSI chain. The function of this virtual SCSI chain is to uniquely identify the device and link it correctly with a matching physical device which is served by the server i5/os partition. Understanding the structure of this virtual SCSI chain is important to any virtual SCSI device related tasks such as adding a new disk. Let me explain it first, therefore. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 221

236 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Each virtual SCSI device in Linux partition is uniquely identified by a combination of a virtual adapter -> a bus -> a target number -> Logical Unit Number (LUN). To illustrate this point in a visual fashion, open your Linux terminal session and type: lsscsi You get the screen as illustrated in Example 5-3. Example 5-3 Virtual SCSI chain example rchas10d:/proc/scsi # lsscsi [0:0:0:0] disk IBM VDASD SLES9I /dev/sda [0:1:0:0] cd/dvd IBM VOPT OPT /dev/sr0 [0:1:1:0] cd/dvd IBM VOPT OPTVRT /dev/sr1 [0:2:0:0] tape IBMVSCSI VIRTUAL TAPE 0001 /dev/st0 [0:2:1:0] tape IBMVSCSI VIRTUAL TAPE 0001 /dev/st1 On the first line of the response, you see [0:0:0:0]. This is the combination of a virtual adapter, a bus, a target number, and a LUN, and is called a SCSI address. A virtual SCSI chain is a collection of these SCSI addresses. Let me explain what [0:0:0:0] means: The first 0 is for a virtual adapter. One server i5/os partition can support multiple virtual adapters but from client partition s perspective, there s only one virtual adapter per server. Therefore, this number is always 0 on the client Linux partition. In Linux term, a virtual adapter is a host. Note: In fact, the maximum number of virtual adapters per server i5/os partition is 65,536. But in reality, much smaller number like 20 will be sufficient. There are other types of virtual adapters than SCSI adapter such as serial adapter and ethernet adapter. The second 0 is for a bus number of a SCSI bus. As illustrated in our example, bus number 0 is for disk devices, 1 is for optical devices such as CDs or DVDs, and 2 is for tape devices. One virtual adapter can support up to 8 buses. In Linux term, a bus number is a channel. The third 0 is a target number which is unique per device under a certain bus. In our example, /dev/sda device has a target number 0 in bus number 0, /dev/sr0 device has a target number 0 under bus number 1, and so on. Again, the range of target numbers can be from 0 to 63. One bus can support up to 64 target number, that is 64 devices. In Linux term, a target number is an id. The fourth 0 is a LUN. LUN 0 is currently used for all devices. In Linux term, a LUN is still a LUN. Creating disk and adding it to a Linux partition Now we are ready to create a new disk and add it to a Linux partition. 1. Create a new disk, i.e. a new NWSSTG. Then we need to link it to a NWSD matching our Linux partition. For this step, follow instruction of the steps in Creating NWSSTG on page 86 and in Attaching the NWSSTG with the NWSD on page 91. Give a name like HOME1 for new NWSSTG. 2. Open a Linux terminal session and execute lsscsi command to list SCSI devices. We see the same screen as above and shown in Example Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

237 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Example 5-4 List of SCSI devices rchas10d:/proc/scsi # lsscsi [0:0:0:0] disk IBM VDASD SLES9I /dev/sda [0:1:0:0] cd/dvd IBM VOPT OPT /dev/sr0 [0:1:1:0] cd/dvd IBM VOPT OPTVRT /dev/sr1 [0:2:0:0] tape IBMVSCSI VIRTUAL TAPE 0001 /dev/st0 [0:2:1:0] tape IBMVSCSI VIRTUAL TAPE 0001 /dev/st1 3. A virtual SCSI address of the existing disk device is [0:0:0:0]. Next available address for a disk device is [0:0:1:0]. To add a new disk to an existing virtual SCSI chain with this new address, type: echo "scsi add-single-device " > /proc/scsi/scsi 4. Use lsscsi command again to assure that disk was added. Example 5-5 List of SCSI devices - with new disk rchas10d:~> lsscsi [0:0:0:0] disk IBM VDASD SLES9I /dev/sda [0:0:1:0] disk IBM VDASD HOME /dev/sdb [0:1:0:0] cd/dvd IBM VOPT OPT /dev/sr0 [0:1:1:0] cd/dvd IBM VOPT OPTVRT /dev/sr1 [0:2:0:0] tape IBMVSCSI VIRTUAL TAPE 0001 /dev/st0 [0:2:1:0] tape IBMVSCSI VIRTUAL TAPE 0001 /dev/st1 Saving and removing /home directory Next task is saving the contents of /home directory from your old disk. 1. Save the /home directory using one of the methods described in Section 5.5.2, i5/os oriented backup on page 238 or in Section 5.5.3, Linux oriented backup on page Remove /home directory. Use Webmin Others File Manager. Highlight /home directory and click on Delete icon as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 223

238 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-45 Webmin - delete /home directory 3. Confirm deleting. Press Delete button. Partitioning the new disk using YaST and LVM Unlike i5/os system, in Linux, or any UNIX operating system, the system administrators are responsible in managing disk space. IBM s Logical Volume Manager (LVM) helps Linux system administrators manage storage in very flexible methods. LVM is built into the base operating system and is provided as part of the YaST in case of SLES 9. Before we begin with actual steps, let me briefly explain the steps of creating a logical volume using LVM in Linux: Create a disk partition: You create a disk partition in LVM context with the hard disk. In our example, we create a disk partition, /dev/sdb1, using a SCSI disk device, /dev/sdb. Initialize a physical volume with a matching disk partition (this step is taken implicitly by LVM). Create a volume group then add the physical volume to it. In our example, a volume group is home and a physical volume is /dev/sdb1. Create a logical volume using the space of the volume group. In our example, the full path name of the logical volume is /dev/home/homevol. Mount a newly created logical volume to a file system you want to increase the size. In our example, it s mounting /dev/hom/homevol to /home. This section describes these steps in further details. 1. Open VNC session to your Linux partition configured for KDE. 224 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

239 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm 2. When you open a KDE session, you would see New hardware found message as illustrated in Figure This message shows up because we have created a new disk. Answer Yes to configure this disk. Tip: Just in case you don t get this message automatically, to the following steps: Click on YaST icon. Run as root - KDE su window shows up. This requires a root password. key in root password. Select System and then Partitioner to get a screen shown in Figure 5-48 on page 226. Figure 5-46 VNC - new hardware found 3. Type root password and press OK button as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 225

240 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-47 VNC - Run as root 4. Read warning message and then press OK button as illustrated in Figure Figure 5-48 VNC - Warning before work with Partitioner 5. Select new disk and press Create button to configure this disk as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

241 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-49 VNC - YaST - Expert Partitioner 6. Select the disk on which you would like to create a partition. In our example it is /dev/sdb which is new HOME1 disk as illustrated in Figure Figure 5-50 YaST - Expert Partitioner - which disk? 7. Select type of partition you want to create. In our example it is Primary partition as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 227

242 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-51 YaST - Expert Partitioner - which type of partition? 8. Next screen as illustrated in Figure 5-40 is about the format and size of the partition. Default Format option is to format. In this example, we want this new partition to be managed under LVM. Therefore, click on Do not format radio button. For File system ID, select 0xE Linux LVM. Then press OK button to create. Figure 5-52 YaST - Expert Partitioner - Create primary partition 9. Highlight newly created partition, /dev/sdb1. Press LVM button as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

243 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-53 YaST - Expert Partitioner - start LVM 10.Create a new Volume Group. In our example, we name this new volume group, home. Press OK button as illustrated in Figure Figure 5-54 YaST - Expert Partitioner - create new Volume Group Chapter 5. Administration and operations 229

244 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 11.Add the partition we created, /dev/sdb1, to new volume group, home. Select the partition and press Add Volume button as illustrated in Figure Behind the scene, LVM initializes a physical volume /dev/sdb1 with the disk partition of the same name, /dev/sdb1. Figure 5-55 YaST - LVM - Add Volume You should see the size of the volume group goes from 0 MB to the size of the physical volume which is 2.9 GB. 12.Now, you see the physical volume /dev/sdb1 belongs to the volume group home as highlighted in Figure Press Next button to move on to the next step of creating a logical volume. 230 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

245 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-56 YaST - LVM - Next 13.Now we create a new logical volume in the volume group. We do this by pressing Add button on the Logical Volumes screen as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 231

246 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-57 YaST - LVM - Add a. On Format box, select Format radio button and select ext3 file system as illustrated in Figure b. On Logical Volume name field, give the name of the logical volume we are creating. In our example, we give the name like homevol. c. Click on max button to add the whole space of the volume group to this logical volume. d. Select /home as Mount Point. e. Press OK button. 232 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

247 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-58 YaST - LVM - Create Logical Volume 14.A screen as illustrated in Figure 5-59 confirms the logical volume was created as we intended. Click Next. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 233

248 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-59 YaST - LVM - Next 15.A screen as illustrated in Figure 5-60 appears. You can check all configured disk and LVM resources from this screen. Verify all the information and if everything is correct, click Apply. 234 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

249 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-60 YaST - Expert Partitioner - Apply 16.You get the screen as illustrated in Figure 5-61 which lists the changes you made so far. Check the list and press Finish button to finally make changes into the system. Figure 5-61 YaST - confirm changes 17.Progress status screen as illustrated in Figure 5-62 appears. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 235

250 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-62 YaST - preparing disk Mount operation equivalent to Linux command, mount /dev/home/homevol /home, is executed automatically. Now a new space of 2.9 GB is created and mounted to /home directory. Restore /home directory and check status of new disk 1. Restore /home directory one of the methods described in Section 5.5.5, i5/os oriented restore on page 259 or Section 5.5.6, Linux oriented restore on page Check the disk capacity as illustrated in Example 5-6. On the Linux terminal session, type: df -h Example 5-6 Disks capacity status rchas10d:/ # df -h Filesystem Size Used Avail Use% Mounted on /dev/sda3 4.3G 2.1G 2.1G 50% / tmpfs 556M 4.0K 556M 1% /dev/shm :/Sles9_i5_bck 230G 161G 70G 70% /backup /dev/mapper/home-homevol 2.9G 35M 2.7G 2% /home Note: You see the file system of /dev/mapper/home-homevol for /home directory. It is because Linux uses a mapper for logical volume path names. 3. Check if a logical volume, i.e. disk, will be mounted in boot time as illustrated in Example 5-7. Type: cat /etc/fstab 236 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

251 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Example 5-7 Filesystem table rchas10d:/ # cat /etc/fstab /dev/sda3 / ext3 acl,user_xattr 1 1 /dev/sda2 swap swap pri= devpts /dev/pts devpts mode=0620,gid=5 0 0 proc /proc proc defaults 0 0 sysfs /sys sysfs noauto 0 0 /dev/cdrom /media/cdrom subfs fs=cdfss,ro,procuid,nosuid,nodev,exec,iocharset=utf8 0 0 /dev/cdrom11 /media/cdrom11 subfs fs=cdfss,ro,procuid,nosuid,nodev,exec,iocharset=utf :/Sles9_i5_bck /backup nfs defaults 0 0 /dev/home/homevol /home ext3 acl,user_xattr 1 2 This concludes the task of managing disk space using LVM for Linux on i5. Whenever you need more space for a particular directory, now you can add a new disk then use LVM to tie this new space into that directory. Here we have used the example of /home directory with home volume group, homevol logical volume name and /dev/sdb disk but the same principles apply to any volume group, directory, logical volume, and so on. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 237

252 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 5.5 Backup and recovery In this section we discuss backup strategy for Linux partitions. This section also introduces some tools for backup Backup strategy for Linux partition We assume you have virtual I/O for your Linux partition where disk storage resources are served by the i5/os partition. Therefore, there are four components which should be part of your save/restore strategy: NWS Storage Space (NWSSTG): All Linux disks are parts of objects called in i5/os terminology Network Server Storage Space. NWS Description (NWSD): All information about image of Linux server are described inside of object called in i5/os terminology Network Server Description (NWSD). NWS Storage Space Link: Information about links among NWSD and NWS Storage Spaces are part both of NWS Storage Space and NWSD. Partition: All information about setting Linux partition are stored on HMC configuration i5/os oriented backup i5/os gives you the following possibilities to save data for Linux partition: Save entire system (option 21 in i5/os Save menu). This option save all data from i5/os including NWSD or NWS Storage Spaces or links among NWSD and NWS Storage Spaces. Data saved this way can be used for recovery of an entire system and for recovery of a part of system like NWS Storage Space or NWSD. It is a common practice that this is done once in a month. Save system data only (option 22 in i5/os Save menu). This option saves NWSSTG and NWSD. It is a common practice that this is done once in a week. Save all user data (option 23 in i5/os Save menu). This option saves NWSSTG. These three options are base backup options in an i5/os strategy. They give us a weekly copy of two parts of Linux environment. This is probably enough for NWSD because it does not change frequently. But for the data in NWSSTG we need to implement the daily backup strategy. There are two possibilities. First is to save it on NWSSTG level and second is to save on files or directories level. We also assume that a base i5/os strategy includes a daily backup of all new and changed document (option 31 in i5/os Save menu). NWSSTG level backup This is backing up the whole NWSSTG space, i.e. whole disk in Linux term. This section explains the steps for this task. 238 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

253 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm All NWSSTG spaces are in /QFPNWSSTG directory in IFS of i5/os. One of the i5/os object types is Save file (*SAVF). This section describes the method of backing up NWSSTG using this object type. It does compress data file while it saves it and is similar to the way how tar file in Linux works. 1. If the Linux server is still up and running, stop it fist. On Linux terminal session, type: shutdown -h now 2. Then you need to vary off NWSD. On i5/os command entry, type: VRYCFG CFGOBJ(LINUX) CFGTYPE(*NWS) STATUS(*OFF) Give the name of corresponding NWSD to your Linux partition to CFGOBJ parameter. In our example, it is LINUX. 3. Create a library where you will store NWS Storage Spaces on daily bases CRTLIB LNXBACKUP 4. Create SAVF (with name NWSSSx where NWSSS is a name of NWS Storage Space and x is day in week) to which you save your Linux NWS Storage Space. CRTSAVF LNXBACKUP/NWSDSSx 5. Repeat CRTSAVF step for all other NWS Storage Spaces you want to save. 6. Save your NWS Storage Spaces to this SAVF with data compression, assuming that LINUX is the name of NWSD: SAV DEV( /QSYS.LIB/LNXBACKUP.LIB/NWSSSx.FILE ) OBJ(( /QFPNWSSTG/LINUX )) DTACPR(*YES) 7. Repeat SAV step for all other NWS Storage Spaces you want to save. 8. Vary on your NWSD. 9. The SAVF will be saved during daily save of new or changed documents. 10.The LNXBACKUP library can be cleaned after weekly save of all user data. Tip: You can save NWSD in LNXBACKUP library as well as a part of saved configuration data. Create SAVF and then use option 10 from Save menu on i5/os. Files and directories level backup This section describes the method of files and directories level backup. Note: This type of backup has the advantage of not requiring the Linux partition to be varied off, i.e. to be down. This task consists of a few sub tasks: Create a new directory in i5/os IFS and export it to NFS Mount this NFS directory to Linux file system Create script in Linux for backup files and directories to this NFS drive Schedule this operation This IFS directory exported to NFS will be then saved in i5/os on base daily backup of new and changed documents. Note: We assume that virtual ethernet line between i5/os and Linux partition already exists. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 239

254 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Creating a new directory in i5/os IFS and exporting it to NFS 1. Create a new directory in i5/os IFS. On iseries Navigator, select File Systems Integrated File System Root. Right click on root and select New Folder as illustrated in Figure Figure 5-63 Create new folder 2. On the New Folder Window as illustrated in Figure Give a folder name and select No on the Scan objects created in folder value. Then click OK. Figure 5-64 New folder parameters 3. On the iseries start the NFS server. Select Network Servers TCP/IP. Right-click NFS and then select Start All. 240 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

255 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-65 NFS - select all 4. Right click on the NFS again and select Properties. Check the check box Start when TCP/IP is started and click OK button. Figure 5-66 Start NFS when TCP/IP is started Chapter 5. Administration and operations 241

256 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 5. From the IFS, select the desired directory that will hold the Linux backup. Right-click and select NFS Export and then Properties. Figure 5-67 Select NFS Export - Properties 6. Check on Add to list of permanent defined export checkbox as illustrated in Figure An entry is added to IFS /etc/exports file. Figure 5-68 Export an IFS directory Mount this NFS directory to Linux file system 242 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

257 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Mounting the NFS directory to Linux file system 1. Mount NFS directory to Linux. Use Webmin System Disk and Network Filesystems Figure 5-69 Select Disk and Network Filesystems 2. From a pull down menu, select Network Filesystem (nfs) first then push Add Mount button as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 243

258 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-70 Add Mount nfs 3. Select NFS Hostname ( is IP address of i5/os partition on virtual ethernet line). Figure 5-71 Select NFS Hostname 4. Select NFS directory which we exported using iseries Navigator. 244 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

259 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-72 Select NFS directory 5. Type a name of directory which you want to create for this operation to Mounted As field. Check the radio buttons Save and restart at boot and Mount. Then press on the Create button. Figure 5-73 Create mount in /backup directory 6. Check if mount was created. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 245

260 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-74 Check created mount Creating a backup script There can be a number of backup method in Linux depending on the commands you use or depending on the type of applications or services your are backing up. In this section, we provide a method in case of a file server application. Assume that our Linux system is defined as File server and the actual directory we are saving is /home directory. 1. From Webmin main menu, select Others File Manager. Then create bckhome.sh script file under root directory as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

261 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-75 Backup script 2. Add it the privileges to be executed like on Figure Figure 5-76 File privileges for backup script Now you can execute this script any time you want to backup /home directory to the i5/os IFS file, homedir. Next we will schedule it for periodic backup. Scheduling backup Let s assume that your backup strategy dictates a daily backup for all new and changed documents should take place at 23:00 and all the backup copies should be placed on i5/os side. That means we need the backup of Linux files and directories on i5/os side should take Chapter 5. Administration and operations 247

262 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am place right before 23:00, for example at 22:30. This section shows you how to accomplish this task. 1. Use Webmin System Scheduled Cron Jobs. Choose Create a new scheduled cron job link. Fill Job Details like on Figure Figure 5-77 Create Cron Job - Job Details Then choose time When to execute and press Create button like on Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

263 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-78 Create Cron Jobs - When to execute Then you can see this job in Scheduled CronJobs like on Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 249

264 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-79 Schedule Cron Jobs 2. Synchronize time between i5/os and Linux partitions. 3. Next day you can see homedir.tgz file in /Sles9_i5_bck directory in IFS your i5/os with time of creation about 22:30 like on Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

265 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-80 iseries Navigator - Linux backup file Linux oriented backup Linux oriented backup has the same attributes as i5/os oriented backup on file and directory level. Only difference is that the backup files are not saved to files in NFS directory but directly on tape. Tape is directly connected to i5/os environment but can be used in Linux as virtual tape. There are three step which need to be done to successfully save Linux files and directories on tape connected to i5/os partition. 1. Initialize tape for Linux. On i5/os, the standard code for coding letters and numbers used is EBCDIC whereas on Linux it is ASCII. This means in the scenario of Linux oriented backup, you need to strictly sort out tapes cartridges for i5/os and for Linux. The following command is an example of initializing the tape cartridge for Linux: INZTAP DEV(TAP02) NEWVOL(LNXBCK) CHECK(*NO) CODE(*ASCII) CLEAR(*YES) 2. Find the name convention for i5 tape in Linux. Use dmesg grep st command in ssh Putty to find the name of tape you want to use to Linux backup. In our scenario we have there two tape devices, st0 and st1, and the messages during boot regarding tapes was following: st: Version , fixed bufsize 32768, s/g segs 256 Attached scsi tape st0 at scsi0, channel 2, id 0, lun 0 st0: try direct i/o: yes (alignment 512 B), max page reachable by HBA Attached scsi tape st1 at scsi0, channel 2, id 1, lun 0 st1: try direct i/o: yes (alignment 512 B), max page reachable by HBA Figure 5-81 dmesg - boot messages refarding tapes Chapter 5. Administration and operations 251

266 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 3. Assume that the order of tape devices is the same in i5/os and Linux and we want use TAP02 (not TAP01) in i5/os terminology, meaning we need to find st1 tape in Linux. Find where the st1 is located in Linux. Use ssh Putty and command: find / -name st1 We receive the following output as illustrated in Figure rchas10d:~ # find / -name st1 /sys/class/scsi_tape/st1 /dev/st1 Figure 5-82 Find the tape location Because st1 is a device the /dev/st1 is the right path to tape. 4. Vary off tape on i5/os. Use 5250 screen and command: VRYCFG CFGOBJ(TAP02) CFGTYPE(*DEV) STATUS(*OFF) RANGE(*OBJ) 5. Use ssh Putty screen to check status of tape. Use command mt -f /dev/st1 status We receive the output as illustrated in Figure rchas10d:~ # mt -f /dev/st1 status drive type = Generic SCSI-2 tape drive status = sense key error = 0 residue count = 0 file number = 0 block number = 0 Tape block size 512 bytes. Density code 0x30 (unknown). Soft error count since last status=0 General status bits on ( ): BOT ONLINE IM_REP_EN Figure 5-83 Tape status Tip: When you receive error message like mt: /dev/st1: Input/output error try following: Check at first if the tape cartridge isn t ejected. Use command sg_start /dev/sgx 1 where x you find by completing information from sg_map command and dmesg grep sg and dmesg grep st commands. 6. Use Webmin System Filesystem Backup. Choose the directory you want to backup from the pulldown menu first then click on Add a new backup of directory button as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

267 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-84 Webmin - Filesystem Backup - Add a new backup directory 7. Fill the appropriate data to Backup to and Backup label fields as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 253

268 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-85 Webmin - Add New Backup 8. If you want to schedule this backup choose this option and set the appropriate time. Then press one of the buttons below depending if you choose scheduling or not as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

269 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-86 Webmin - Add New Backup - continue 9. When you choose Create and Backup Now button you would receive following message as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 255

270 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-87 Webmin - Backup now 10.Eject the cartridge and deactive tape device on Linux to be able use it on i5/os. Use following Linux commands: mt -f /dev/st1 rewind to rewind the tape mt -f /dev/st1 eject to eject the tape sg_map for recognize mapping among default and generic devices. We receive output which shown on Example 5-8. Example 5-8 Mapping among default and generic devices rchas10d:~ # sg_map Error opening /dev/st0 : Input/output error /dev/sg0 /dev/sda /dev/sg1 /dev/sdb /dev/sg2 /dev/sr0 /dev/sg3 /dev/sr1 /dev/sg4 /dev/sg5 /dev/st1 sg_reset -d /dev/sg5 to release tape device from Linux. 256 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

271 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm HMC backup 11.Label this tape correctly to be recognized among i5/os backup tapes. Now Linux side backup operation is completed. 12.Vary on tape in i5/os partition so that the device now can be used by i5/os folks. Use command VRYCFG CFGOBJ(TAP02) CFGTYPE(*DEV) STATUS(*ON) In case of HMC backup, we need to consider two backup and restore scenarios: First scenario is the case of a HMC box s hard disk itself gets crashed. Second scenario is HMC box itself is OK but you need to work on the contents of it. For example, you might encounter the case of some files get corrupted, or you want to test new setting while preserving the current setting for backup purpose. HMC critical console data backup For this scenario, you need to be ready to be able to restore the whole environment of HMC configuration. The information about partition profiles are part of HMC s critical console data which is needed to save on DVD-RAM medium after every approved change. Use Management Environment <host_computer> Licensed Internal Code Maintenance HMC Code Update and here click on Back up Critical Console Data (see Figure 5-88). Figure 5-88 HMC - Back up Critical Console Data Select Back up to DVD on local system and press Next button. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 257

272 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-89 Back up to DVD on local system Type some description, insert DVD-RAM medium and press OK button in Figure Figure 5-90 Description for DVD medium Store DVD medium on secure place to be able to restore data when needed. Partition profiles backup from HMC This is for the case when you need to save the information about partitions temporarily on disk drive. Use Management Environment <host_computer> Server and Partition Server Management and in the contents area, right-click the managed system whose partition data you want to save and select Profile Data > Backup (see Figure 5-91). 258 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

273 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-91 HMC - Backup Profile Data Type some meaningful name of backup file and press OK button in Figure Figure 5-92 Profile Data Backup File name i5/os oriented restore This is how to restore data saved in i5/os oriented backup on page 238. Restoring NWSD NWSD called LINUXD saved by option 10 from Save menu as mentioned in i5/os oriented backup on page 238 can be restored by command: RSTCFG OBJ(LINUXD) DEV(*SAVF) OBJTYPE(*NWSD) SAVF(LNXBACKUP/I5CFG) Chapter 5. Administration and operations 259

274 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am When saved to tape by option 21 or 22 from Save menu then can be restored by following command: RSTCFG OBJ(LINUXD) DEV(TAP0X) OBJTYPE(*NWSD) Recovery for NWS Storage Spaces level NWS Storage Space saved by SAV command to SAVF from i5/os oriented backup on page 238 can be restored by command: RST DEV( /QSYS.LIB/LNXBACKUB.LIB/NWSSS1.FILE ) OBJ(( /QFPNWSSTG/LINUX )) If you are not sure which NWS Storage Space is saved in the SAVF you can use command: DSPSAVF <library>/<savf> to display objects saved in <savf>. When saved to tape by option 21 or 23 from Save menu, it can be restored by following command: RST DEV( /QSYS.LIB/TAP0X.DEVD ) OBJ(( /QFPNWSSTG/LINUX )) Important: The link between NWSD and NWS Storage space is saved in both. Recovery for file and directory level Restore files from tape by following command: RST DEV( /QSYS.LIB/TAP0X.DEVD ) OBJ(( /Sles9_i5_bck/* )) You can use following script used for uncompress and extract files from archive file to /tmp directory as illustrated in Figure Figure 5-93 Restore script Restore lost files and delete extracted files from /tmp directory. 260 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

275 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Linux oriented restore 1. Insert tape cartridge with Linux backup which was done on base instruction in Linux oriented backup on page Vary off tape device in i5/os partition. 3. Use ssh Putty to issue command: cd /tmp && tar pxf /dev/st1 to restore /home directory to /tmp/home directory. 4. Eject the tape cartridge and deallocate tape from Linux. 5. Vary on tap device on i5/os HMC profiles restore If the crash of hard drive takes place, you can use the data you saved on DVD only in conjunction with a reinstallation of the HMC from the product CDs. The details you can find in eserver Information Center in Working with the HMC>Backing up and restoring the HMC>Reinstalling the HMC machine code section. Regarding how to restore temporary saved partition information, use Management Environment <managed i5 name> Server and Partition Server Management and in the contents area, right-click the managed system whose partition data you want to restore and select Profile Data > Restore (see Figure 5-94). Figure 5-94 HMC - Restore Profile Data Select file you saved before and check one of the offered Restore Options and press OK button as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 261

276 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-95 Select Restore file and Options 262 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

277 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm 5.6 Troubleshooting This section introduces some experiences we encountered during the residency to create this redbook HMC error reporting Here is a guideline how to collect information needed for reporting problems and where to find information relating HMC error codes. Where to find installed HMC version Use Management Environment <host_computer> Licensed Internal Code Maintenance HMC Code Update. There in section STATUS you can see HMC version (see Figure 5-96). Figure 5-96 HMC Code version Where to find installed LIC version Use Management Environment <managed i5 name> Licensed Internal Code Maintenance Licensed Internal Code Update. There click on Change Internal Code (see Figure 5-97). Chapter 5. Administration and operations 263

278 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 5-97 HMC - Change Internal Code Select i5 system and press OK button as illustrated in Figure Figure 5-98 HMC select Target Object Select View system information radio check box and press OK button as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

279 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure 5-99 HMC - select View system information Specify Hard drive as a source of information about LIC as illustrated in Figure Figure HMC - Specify LIC Repository Write out the data displayed as in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 265

280 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure HMC - LIC level Where to find system information Use the same way described in Chapter 5.4.1, Invoking DST from HMC on page 208. In Operator Panel Service Function select System Functions popup menu and click on System Type, Model, and Feature Code (20) (see Figure 5-102). Figure HMC - System Functions Write down information displayed in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

281 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure HMC - System Information Now search IBM website to supported level, its matching and possible bugs. HMC error codes Detail information about HMC error codes you can find in eserver Information Center under path Analyzing and handling problems > Reference codes list > HMC error codes Common errors with Linux installation In this section we reproduce some of the most common installation errors. We divide every installation problem scenario in three steps. 1. Symptom 2. Problem determination 3. Corrective action Common Linux installation error scenario 1 1. Symptom: An attempt to vary on the partition from the work configuration status with the command: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) a Fail status is presented in the partition as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 267

282 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Position to..... Work with Configuration Status Starting characters RCHAS10 09/08/04 10:44:54 Type options, press Enter. 1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 8=Work with description 9=Display mode status 13=Work with APPN status... Opt Description Status Job LINUX1 FAILED Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F23=More options F24=More keys Bottom Figure Work with configuration status -FAILED status 2. Problem determination: All error messages related to the NWSD should appear in QSYSOPR indicating a description of the problem and a resolution to the problem. To reach the QSYSOPR job log write the following command: DSPMSG QSYSOPR Search for a message like: Network server LINUX1 vary on failed. Press F1 key near the message to see the details. In this scenario the reason code is as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

283 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Additional Message Information Message ID : CPDB1AD Severity : 40 Message type..... : Information Date sent : 09/07/04 Time sent : 15:12:07 Message.... : Network server LINUX1 vary on failed. Cause..... : The network server failed to vary on with reason code Reason codes and their meanings follow: : Storage space not found : Partition not found : Partition not correct type : Server already varied on for partition : Partition already active : A file system error occurred accessing the IPL stream file : IPL source not valid : IPL of partition failed : A host partition is not configured for this partition : A network server storage space linked to this network server is damaged : Invalid resource name : Resource name does not match partition : Unable to determine partition for resource name : Unknown error occured. See previous messages in the job log for details. Recovery... : Correct the error. Try the request again. Press Enter to continue. More... F3=Exit F6=Print F9=Display message details F12=Cancel F21=Select assistance level Figure qsysopr job log 3. Corrective action: Verify that the resource name in the NWSD is set to *AUTO. If this is already set, correct it to the CTLxx identifier as we illustrated on Section, Creating NWSD on page 88. Common Linux installation error scenario 2 1. Symptom: An attempt to vary on the partition from the work configuration status doing the command: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) a Fail status is presented in the partition as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 269

284 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Position to..... Work with Configuration Status Starting characters RCHAS10 09/08/04 10:44:54 Type options, press Enter. 1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 8=Work with description 9=Display mode status 13=Work with APPN status... Opt Description Status Job LINUX1 FAILED Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F23=More options F24=More keys Bottom Figure Work with configuration status -FAILED status 2. Problem determination: All error messages related to the NWSD should appear in QSYSOPR indicating a description of the problem and a resolution to the problem. To reach the QSYSOPR job log write the following command: DSPMSG QSYSOPR Search for a message like: Network server LINUX1 vary on failed. Press F1 key near the message to see the details. In this scenario the reason code is as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

285 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Additional Message Information Message ID : CPDB1AD Severity : 40 Message type..... : Information Date sent : 09/07/04 Time sent : 15:22:07 Message.... : Network server LINUX1 vary on failed. Cause..... : The network server failed to vary on with reason code Reason codes and their meanings follow: : Storage space not found : Partition not found : Partition not correct type : Server already varied on for partition : Partition already active : A file system error occurred accessing the IPL stream file : IPL source not valid : IPL of partition failed : A host partition is not configured for this partition : A network server storage space linked to this network server is damaged : Invalid resource name : Resource name does not match partition : Unable to determine partition for resource name : Unknown error occured. See previous messages in the job log for details. Recovery... : Correct the error. Try the request again. Press Enter to continue. More... F3=Exit F6=Print F9=Display message details F12=Cancel F21=Select assistance level Figure qsysopr job log 3. Corrective action: In this failure we need to do two verifications: a. Assure that the power controlling partition is set in the partition profile to the partition that you are trying to power on the NWSD from. To verify, on your HMC in Navigation Area select Server and Partition Server Management. Then do a right click over the partition profile and select Properties as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 271

286 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure Partition profile - properties Then over properties window select on Power Controlling tab as illustrated in Figure Verify that the power partition controlling is the i5/os partition that is hosting the resources to the Linux partition. Figure Power controlling option b. Verify that you have the remote partition and remote virtual slot number defined for the virtual SCSI connection. To verify select Server and Partition Server Management, click on Partitions and right click over partition profile of your Linux partition and select Properties as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

287 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure Attaching Hardware Devices - Changing Linux Profile On Logical Partition Profile Properties select Virtual I/O as illustrated in Figure Figure Logical Partition Profile Properties - General Tab Then on the virtual I/O panel highlight the client SCSI virtual adapter and click on the Properties button as illustrated in Figure Chapter 5. Administration and operations 273

288 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure Virtual I/O tab On the virtual SCSI adapter properties window verify that the remote partition match with the i5/os partition and the slot number match with the number of the server virtual SCSI. an example is given on Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

289 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure Virtual SCSI adapter tab Common Linux installation error scenario 3 1. Symptom: An attempt to vary on the partition from the work configuration status doing the command: WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) a Fail status is presented in the partition as illustrated in Figure Position to..... Work with Configuration Status Starting characters RCHAS10 09/08/04 10:44:54 Type options, press Enter. 1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 8=Work with description 9=Display mode status 13=Work with APPN status... Opt Description Status Job LINUX1 FAILED Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F23=More options F24=More keys Bottom Figure Work with configuration status -FAILED status 2. Problem determination: All error messages related to the NWSD should appear in QSYSOPR indicating a description of the problem and a resolution to the problem. To reach the QSYSOPR job log write the following command: Chapter 5. Administration and operations 275

290 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am DSPMSG QSYSOPR Search for a message like: Network server LINUX1 vary on failed. Press F1 key near the message to see the details. In this scenario the reason code is as illustrated in Figure Additional Message Information Message ID : CPDB1AD Severity : 40 Message type..... : Information Date sent : 09/07/04 Time sent : 15:13:07 Message.... : Network server LINUX1 vary on failed. Cause..... : The network server failed to vary on with reason code Reason codes and their meanings follow: : Storage space not found : Partition not found : Partition not correct type : Server already varied on for partition : Partition already active : A file system error occurred accessing the IPL stream file : IPL source not valid : IPL of partition failed : A host partition is not configured for this partition : A network server storage space linked to this network server is damaged : Invalid resource name : Resource name does not match partition : Unable to determine partition for resource name : Unknown error occured. See previous messages in the job log for details. Recovery... : Correct the error. Try the request again. Press Enter to continue. More... F3=Exit F6=Print F9=Display message details F12=Cancel F21=Select assistance level Figure qsysopr job log 3. Corrective action: First, verify that the path that you give in the IPL stream file is correct. This path can vary depending of the Linux distribution. Other possibility is that the CD is not mounted or is being used by other application. Additionally, if you are using a virtual CD catalog, it is possible that the virtual CD device is not varied on, the catalog is not loaded on the device, or a wrong volume is mounted in the library. Common Linux installation error scenario 4 1. Symptom: During the installation the installation wizard prompted to insert the next media but even you change the media and the installer cannot detect the new CD. 2. Problem determination: Verify if the PTF MF33501 is installed on the system. To verify run the following instruction on i5/os emulator: DSPPTF LICPGM( ) Figure shows an example where this PTF is installed. 276 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

291 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Display PTF Status System: Product ID : IPL source : ##MACH#B ##SERV#T Release of base option : V5R3M0 L00 RCHAS10 Type options, press Enter. 5=Display PTF details 6=Print cover letter 8=Display cover letter PTF IPL Opt ID Status Action MF33501 Temporarily applied None MF33499 Temporarily applied None MF33497 Temporarily applied None MF33493 Temporarily applied None MF33491 Temporarily applied None MF33490 Temporarily applied None MF33489 Temporarily applied None MF33488 Superseded None MF33487 Temporarily applied None F3=Exit F11=Display alternate view F17=Position to F12=Cancel Hypervisor changes not allowed. More... Figure Display PTF status 3. Corrective action: Load PTF MF33501 is need. Note: Sometimes when the installer prompted for the CD, you need to try OK a couple of times for the installer to recognize the disk switch. Common Linux installation error scenario 5 1. Symptom: The virtual console served through the server i5/os partition s Telnet server do not show the Linux partition as illustrated in Figure OS/400 Guest Partition Consoles 2: AIX1(V1-C4/V2-C0) Enter the console partition number: Figure OS/400 guest partition consoles 2. Problem determination: If the Linux partition does not appear in this screen, probably the virtual serial connection between i5/os hosted partition and Linux partition is not yet configured. 3. Corrective action: Create a client serial adapter in the hosting LPAR that connects the server serial adapter from the Linux partition. This procedure is showed in Section, Virtual console setup on page 84. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 277

292 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Common Linux installation error scenario 6 1. Symptom: The virtual console access served through the server i5/os partition s Telnet server indicate that the console is already in use as illustrated in Figure OS/400 Guest Partition Consoles 2: AIX1(V1-C4/V2-C0) 3: LINUX(V4-C6/V3-C0) Enter the console partition number: 3 LINUX: Enter OS/400 service tools userid: LNXUSR LINUX: Enter OS/400 service tools password: LINUX: Console connecting... LINUX: Error: console in use. Figure Linux console provided by i5/os 2. Problem determination: This error occurs when the console is already accessed by the HMC VTerm console. 3. Corrective action: Terminate the HMC Vterm console and then re-attempt to the virtual console connection. Common Linux installation error scenario 7 1. Symptom: The Vterm console access does not display any messages as illustrated in Figure Figure HMC Vterm Linux console 278 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

293 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm 2. Problem determination: This error occurs when the virtual console access served through the server i5/os partition s Telnet server is already in use. 3. Corrective action: Terminate the virtual console connection and then re-attempt to the HMC Vterm console connection. Other common Linux installation error scenarios Table 5-1 shows another possible NWSD error messages that we do not cover in our common installation error scenarios. To give a correct resolution of this problems, follow the code explanation that we give here. If the suggestions cannot solve your problems, contact to your next level of support to find a proper solution to the problem. Table 5-1 NWSD error messages Reason codes Code explanation *NWSSTG was specified as the IPL source, but no storage space was found The partition specified in the PARTITION parameter was not found The partition specified in the PARTITION parameter is not a GUEST partition There is already an NWSD in the i5/os partition that is active and using the partition specified in the PARTITION parameter of the NWSD The partition specified in the PARTITION parameter of the NWSD is powered on (perhaps through the LPAR configuration interface or from another i5/os partition.) The NWSD is set to start from a storage pace (NWSSTG), but for some reason the kernel could not found. Some common reason are that the storage space does not have a disk partition that is formatted as type 0x41 or is marked as startable The partition would not start. There are variety of reason why the partition will not start. You should look at the information for this partition and start reviewing SRCs A network storage space linked to this network server is damaged. Contact your next level support Contact your next level of support to find a proper solution to the problem The resource name you selected in the RSRCNAME parameter exists, but is not in the partition you specified. Use the Work with Hardware Resources (WRKHDWRSC) command with the TYPE(*CMN) parameter to help determinate the resource name in the partition you specified Unable to determinate partition for resource name. Either specify a partition directly or update the resource definition at the HMC to indicate the client partition Unknown error occurred. Contact your next level of support. Partition ID versus partition profile In the partition profile properties are the resources designed to the partition. In the partition ID properties are the resources which the partition really has. The partition profile is realized in time of activation of partition and not all resources or not all values of the resources have to be available at this time. Chapter 5. Administration and operations 279

294 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am That means the changes done in partition profile are not automatically propagated to the partition. For example, if you want to add SCSI virtual resources to running i5/os partition you have to add it to partition profile. Then you have two option how to propagate this change to real environment. One option is to stop this partition and activate it again. The other option is to use Dynamic Logical Partitioning option by right-clicking on partition ID and add or remove resource dynamically (see Figure 5-120). Figure HMC - dynamic logical partitioning The change then can be checked by right-clicking on partition ID, select Properties and then select panel with resources as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

295 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chadm.fm Figure HMC - Partition ID properties Chapter 5. Administration and operations 281

296 6388chadm.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 282 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

297 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm 6 Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 This chapter discusses the steps required in migrating your Linux installation from an existing IBM eserver iseries system to the new IBM eserver i5 hardware. This will not cover the setup of a new Linux server nor will it cover the migration of an entire iseries system to the new eserver i5 systems. One of the most important steps in this migration is that we need to replace Linux kernel: Linux installation on the eserver iseries (a.k.a. legacy systems) uses Linux iseries kernel where as on the eserver i5 systems, we use Linux pseries kernel. That is, even though you will be running your Linux server on an eserver i5, the Linux pseries kernel is required. Note: At time of writing this redbook, RHEL 4 upgrade to eserver i5 was not supported. Therefore, this chapter only covers SLES upgrade and migration. For example, in case of SUSE migration, upgrading your Linux partition on the iseries to SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 does not update the kernel to the pseries kernel. You will need to obtain the pseries kernel when migrating your Linux partition from the eserver iseries to the eserver i5 system. Of course, you would need to do the same for Red Hat migration. Note: We use the term upgrade and migration in the following context: Upgrade is the version upgrade of SLES. Upgrade can take place on the same hardware platform such as eserver iseries. Migration is the process of moving Linux installation from one hardware box to another such as from eserver iseries to eserver i5. Copyright IBM Corp All rights reserved. 283

298 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6.1 Planning for migration Careful planning of your data migration will make the transition much smoother and minimize your downtime. Familiarize yourself with the new concepts and terms in Chapter 1, Introduction to Linux on i5 on page 1. There are significant differences between the iseries and the eserver i5 systems as well as new terms and concepts SLES Linux considerations If your Linux server on your source system is not running SLES 9 or a later release, we recommend you upgrade to SLES 9 before migrating to the new i5 hardware. Upgrading to SLES 9 first gives you the opportunity to work out any software or application issues before changing hardware. SLES 9 can run on non-i5 hardware and does not require V5R3. Refer to the distribution documentation regarding SLES 9 and the changes in this release. Attention: Before you upgrade to SLES 9, ensure all the applications currently running on your Linux server are compatible with this new release of SUSE Linux. There are significant changes between the SLES 8 and SLES 9 versions of Linux. These are just a couple of the known applications that will require updates when upgrading to SLES 9: Apache: Apache 1.3 has been replaced by Apache 2. Refer to the distribution documentation for more details on this change. Samba: Samba LDAP configuration will need to be updated to new Samba 3 LDAP schema. Refer to the following website for more information: There may be changes to ISV applications as well. Refer to your ISV to determine if any changes will be required for your environment. For SLES 9, physical media in a CD-ROM drive across virtual SCSI is supported. If you want to access ISO CD images in IFS you need the PTF MF Evaluate your current Linux environment and your storage utilization. Software tends to grow from release to release. Verify you have available storage for this new release of Linux. If you are running short of available space, make sure to save your data before doing any updating or re-partitioning of your Linux environment i5 considerations Apply all critical fixes and updates for firmware on your target server and for i5/os on your host logical partition. MF33433 is required on your i5/os host logical partition for virtualization. Review Chapter 2, Linux partition planning guide on page 31 for specifics on planning a Linux logical partition on your eserver i5 system. Ensure your eserver i5 target server has adequate memory, processors and disk for your Linux server. 284 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

299 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Minimum processor requirements: 1 processor if using dedicated processors or 0.1 processing units if using shared processors (supports up to 16 processors) Minimum memory requirements: 256 MB (supports up to 16 GB) Minimum I/O requirements: Storage adapter (physical or virtual) Network adapter (physical or virtual) Approximately 2 GB storage, recommended 4GB. Determine how you want your Linux server to start on your eserver i5. There are four different methods. Refer to Section 2.2.1, Power control on page 36 for more details regarding these options. Automatically start with managed system: This may not be the best option for Linux logical partitions using any virtual I/O adapters. It is better to start the Linux server by varying on the NWSD. Activated from the HMC Automatic start when i5/os starts: NWSD set to autostart(*yes) Manual start If you will be using tape to transfer your NWSSTG instead of FTP, ensure your tape drives and media are compatible between the source iseries and the target i5 systems. 6.2 Upgrading your SLES on iseries to SLES 9 SLES 9 is required on eserver i5 hardware. If you are running a previous release of SUSE Linux, it is highly recommended to upgrade to SLES 9 before you move your Linux server to the new eserver i5 hardware. In this section, we upgrade previous version of SLES to SLES 9 on the iseries first. There are significant differences between SLES 8 and SLES 9. Refer to the distribution documentation for more details on the changes for SLES 9 and for more details on the upgrade process. Steps to perform the upgrade: 1. Obtain a copy of the SLES 9 installation CDs or download the ISO images from the website and burn them to CDs. 2. From an iseries 5250 session connected to the iseries hosting partition, shutdown your Linux server: VRYCFG CFGOBJ(servername) CFGTYPE(*NWS) STATUS(*OFF) 3. Save your current Linux server. You may choose to do this save with Linux backup tools or you can use OS/400 tools. The instructions that follow are to save the NWSSTG to a SAVF named SAVE on the iseries hosting system. The NWSSTG has a directory under QFPNWSSTG that is named the same as the NWSSTG. This directory contains the control file and the files that contain the virtual disk. If you have multiple NWSSTG assigned to a server, you will need to create a SAVF for each NWSSTG and save each NWSSTG. CRTSAVF FILE(QGPL/SAVE) SAV DEV( QSYS.LIB/QGPL.LIB/SAVE.FILE ) OBJ(( /QFPNWSSTG/nwsstgname *INCLUDE)) SUBTREE(*ALL) Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 285

300 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Note: if your server is fairly large, you may choose to save it to media instead. See the guide iseries Backup and Recovery, SC for more information. 4. Place the 1st CD into the CD-ROM drive of the iseries hosting partition. 5. Make a note of the current IPL source, IPL stream file and IPL parameters of the NWSD you are about to upgrade. You will need to restore these settings to the NWSD after the upgrade to SLES 9 has completed. 6. Check the distribution documentation for the install file and path to use for the SLES 9 upgrade. 7. Change the NWSD of the Linux server to point to the installation stream file of the CD. CHGNWSD NWSD(servername) IPLSRC(*STMF) IPLSTMF( /QOPT/SU90.001/ISERIES64 ) IPLPARM(*none) 8. Start a PuTTY session to the virtual console of your Linux server using the IP address or hostname of the iseries host partition. Select Telnet and port 2301 as seen in Figure 6-1 and then select Open. Figure 6-1 PuTTY configuration 9. Now, go back to your iseries 5250 session and vary on your Linux server: VRYCFG CFGOBJ(servername) CFGTYPE(*NWS) STATUS(*ON) 10.Your PuTTY session will now change. You will need to enter the partition number of the Linux partition and a valid service tools profile and password as seen in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

301 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm OS/400 Guest Partition Console 2: SLES Enter the console partition number: 2 SLES : Enter OS/400 service tools userid: STACEY SLES : Enter OS/400 service tools password: SLES : Console connecting... Figure 6-2 Linux Virtual Console 11.When your Linux server is booted from CD or DVD, YaST is started. Select I Accept for the Software License Agreement as seen in Figure 6-3 Figure 6-3 Installation screen - license agreement 12.Select your language of choice and select Accept as seen in Figure 6-4. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 287

302 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-4 Installation screen - language choice 13.Select Update an existing system and select OK as seen in Figure 6-5. Figure 6-5 Installation screen - update 14.The next screen (as seen in Figure 6-6) lists the installation suggestions. Carefully review these suggestions. Select Change to make any necessary changes. 288 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

303 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-6 Installation screen - suggested settings 15.When you select Change (as seen in Figure 6-7), you see a list of options. Select any of these to get more information or to change the upgrade suggestions. Figure 6-7 Installation screen - setting changes 16.If there is any issue with the upgrade suggestions, you will receive an error message as seen in Figure 6-8. You need to resolve these issues before being allowed to continue with the upgrade. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 289

304 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-8 Installation screen - error message 17.The Installation Settings screen shows what needs to be resolved. In Figure 6-9, Packages requires manual intervention. This is due to Apache 2 replacing Apache 1.3. Figure 6-9 Installation screen - manual intervention 18.Select Change and then Packages to resolve the issue flagged by the upgrade as seen in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

305 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-10 Installation screen - packages changes 19.You now see a Solving screen as seen in Figure Figure 6-11 Installation screen - solving 20.The Package Dependencies screen appears and you need to select one of the alternatives listed as seen in Figure Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 291

306 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-12 Installation screen - apache 2 21.You need to decide which alternative is best for your situation and then use Select, Delete, or Update to make the necessary changes. In Figure 6-13, Apache 2 has been selected as the alternative of choice. Select Solve to continue. Figure 6-13 Installation screen - choosing apache 2 22.Another Solving screen as seen in Figure 6-14 is shown. 292 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

307 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-14 Installation screen - solving 23.You now get another screen with a list of items that will be changed during the upgrade. By selecting the item listed, you receive more information in the bottom half of the screen as seen in Figure Once you are satisfied with the changes, select Accept to continue. Figure 6-15 Installation screen - additional changes 24.You see the Solving screen again as seen in Figure Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 293

308 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-16 Installation screen - solving 25.A list of Automatic changes are shown and you need to select OK to continue as seen in Figure Figure 6-17 Installation changes - automatic changes 26.You are taken back to the Installation Settings screen where you can make any additional changes or select Accept to continue as seen in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

309 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-18 Installation screen - settings 27.A warning screen (Figure 6-19) appears giving you one more opportunity to make changes before proceeding with the upgrade. Select Yes, Update to upgrade to SLES 9. Figure 6-19 Installation screen - last chance to back out 28.An upgrade installation screen now appears as seen in Figure Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 295

310 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-20 Installation screen - status 29.You are prompted for the next CD as seen in Figure Once the next CD has been inserted into the CD-ROM drive, select OK to continue. Note: You may need to select OK twice to start loading packages from CD2. Figure 6-21 Installation screen - next CD 30.Once the upgrade has gone through all the CDs it needs, a screen showing the next installation steps is shown as seen in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

311 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-22 Finishing installation 31.You see an initial boot screen similar to Figure Figure 6-23 Initial boot after install 32.If you have a connection to the internet, you can test it here. We encourage you to select Yes, Test Connection to the Internet and then download updates to your SLES 9 server at this time. Select Next to continue as seen in Figure Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 297

312 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-24 Internet connection test 33.A status screen appears as the system configuration is written as seen in Figure Figure 6-25 System configuration changes 34.At the Release Notes screen as seen in Figure 6-26, you can read the release notes for SLES 9. Review these notes for more information regarding the SLES 9 release. Select Next to continue. 298 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

313 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-26 SLES 9 release notes 35.When the upgrade is complete, the Installation Completed screen is shown as seen in Figure Select Start YaST Control Center or Finish. Figure 6-27 Installation completed 36.Selecting Finish will get you to a Linux login screen as seen in Figure Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 299

314 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-28 Linux login 37.Once this portion of the upgrade is complete, you need to vary off the Linux server again and change the NWSD. From an iseries 5250 session connected to the iseries host partition, shutdown your Linux server. VRYCFG CFGOBJ(servername) CFGTYPE(*NWS) STATUS(*OFF) 38.Change the NWSD of the Linux server to point to the NWSSTG and to the root partition. Verify your IPLPARM parameter from your notes at Figure 5. CHGNWSD NWSD(servername) IPLSRC(*NWSSTG) IPLSTMF(*NONE) IPLPARM( root=/dev/iseries/vda3 ) 39.Vary on the Linux server VRYCFG CFGOBJ(servername) CFGTYPE(*NWS) STATUS(*ON) 40.You have finished the upgrade to SLES 9. Verify your applications are operating normally. 41.Following an upgrade, it is always a wise decision to save your upgraded system. 6.3 Linux server migration from iseries to eserver i5 Once you have upgraded your Linux server to SLES 9 on iseries and have verified your applications are operating normally, you are ready to migrate this server to the new eserver i5 hardware. We recommend that you resolve any application issues prior to migrating to the eserver i Terms to be familiar with Source server: The existing Linux server which you are planning to migrate to the new eserver i5 system Host logical partition: The i5/os logical partition that will be designated to provide the virtual I/O adapters for your Linux logical partition 300 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

315 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Target server: The new eserver i5 hardware to be partitioned Steps to migrate your Linux server to eserver i5 hardware 1. Apply all critical fixes and updates for firmware and i5/os on your target server. 2. PTF MF33433 is required on your i5/os target server. This is a delayed PTF and will require an IPL to apply. 3. Locate a Linux distribution kernel that is compatible with the IBM eserver i5 system. A pseries Linux kernel is required to ensure compatibility with the eserver i5 system. If you have upgraded your Linux server to SLES 9, you will still be running the iseries kernel and still need to obtain the pseries kernel. a. The pseries kernel may be obtained from either the Linux installation CDs or from a network-based install source. b. If you are using installation CDs, browse the CDs until you find the pseries kernel. At the time of this writing the pseries kernel is found in /suse/ppc directory of the second installation CD and is named kernel-pseries ppc.rpm as seen in Figure Make note of the pseries Linux kernel name and its location. You need this information later in these migration steps. linux:/media/cdrom/suse/ppc # ls kern* kernel-default ppc.rpm kernel-pseries ppc.rpm kernel-iseries ppc.rpm kernel-smp ppc.rpm kernel-pmac ppc.rpm linux:/media/cdrom/suse/ppc # Figure 6-29 pseries kernel on Install CDs 4. Download this pseries kernel to your source Linux server s virtual disk. Use the Linux cp command to copy the kernel to the root directory. From your PuTTY session type the following command: cp <path to kernel><kernel name> /root/ For our Linux server example, the path to the kernel is cdrom/suse/ppc and the kernel name is kernel-pseries ppc.rpm. See Figure linux:/ # cp cdrom/suse/ppc/kernel-pseries ppc.rpm /root/ Figure 6-30 Copying pseries kernel 5. In Figure 6-31, you see the pseries kernel is now in the root directory of the Linux server. linux:/ # cd root linux:~ # ls ke* kernel-pseries ppc.rpm Figure 6-31 pseries kernel 6. From an iseries 5250 session connected to the iseries hosting system, shutdown your Linux server. VRYCFG CFGOBJ(servername) CFGTYPE(*NWS) STATUS(*OFF) Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 301

316 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 7. If your NWSD is specified to autostart or if you start it manually with a startup program, you may want to change this now so your server does not restart on the legacy iseries. 8. Before you proceed with the migration, save any critical data with Linux backup tools. 9. Save your current Linux server to a SAVF to be transferred to the target host logical partition. The instructions that follow are to save the NWSSTG to a SAVF named MIGR on the iseries hosting partition. The NWSSTG has a directory under QFPNWSSTG that is named the same as the NWSSTG. This directory contains the control file and the files that contain the virtual disk. If you have multiple NWSSTG assigned to a server, you need to create a SAVF for each NWSSTG, save each NWSSTG into the SAVF and FTP each SAVF to the target host logical partition. CRTSAVF FILE(QGPL/MIGR) SAV DEV( QSYS.LIB/QGPL.LIB/MIGR.FILE ) OBJ(( /QFPNWSSTG/nwsstgname *INCLUDE)) SUBTREE(*ALL) Note: if your server is fairly large, you may choose to save it to media instead; however, ensure your target system has a compatible tape drive so you can restore this data. See the guide iseries Backup and Recovery, SC for more information. 10.On your target eserver i5 host logical partition, create a SAVF with the same name as the SAVF on the source eserver iseries system. CRTSAVF FILE(QGPL/MIGR) 11.Use FTP to transfer the SAVF from the source system to the target host logical partition. You will receive a File transfer completed successfully message when the transfer completes. Depending on the size of your NWSSTG, this transfer may take some time. See Figure a. ftp targetname a. enter login ID a. enter password b. bin c. put qgpl/migr qgpl/migr 302 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

317 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm File Transfer Protocol Previous FTP subcommands and messages: Connecting to host rchas10.rchland.ibm.com at address using port QTCP at RCHAS Connection will close if idle more than 5 minutes. > stacey 331 Enter password. 230 STACEY logged on. OS/400 is the remote operating system. The TCP/IP version is "V5R3M0". 250 Now using naming format "0". 257 "QGPL" is current library. > bin 200 Representation type is binary IMAGE. > put qgpl/migr qgpl/migr 227 Entering Passive Mode (9,5,92,27,147,120). 150 Sending file to member MIGR in file MIGR in library QGPL. 250 File transfer completed successfully bytes transferred in seconds. Transfer rate KB/sec. Enter an FTP subcommand. ===> Figure 6-32 FTP Transfer 12.Restore your SAVF on the target system using the following command: RST DEV( QSYS.LIB/QGPL.LIB/MIGR.FILE ) OBJ(( /QFPNWSSTG/nwsstg *INCLUDE)) SUBTREE(*ALL) 13.The NWSSTG space shows up on the host logical partition when you do the WRKNWSSTG command. 14.The next step is to create the partition profile and the logical partition for your Linux server. The steps to create a basic hosted Linux logical partition and partition profile are listed here. For more details, refer to Configuring Linux partition on page 62. a. From the HMC, in the navigation area on the left half of the screen, open Server and Partition b. Select Server Management c. In the contents area on the right half of the HMC screen, open the target server as seen in Figure Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 303

318 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-33 HMC Partition Configuration d. Right click Partitions, select Create and then Logical Partitions as seen in Figure Figure 6-34 Create Logical Partition e. You are presented with a Create Logical Partition Wizard that will help guide you through the logical partition creation. Have your LVT information available as you create this logical partition. As you proceed through the wizard, each screen will have a Help button that will give you more information. f. In the first screen, designate the Partition ID and the Partition name. Also select AIX or Linux for your Partition environment. See Figure Click Next to continue. 304 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

319 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-35 Logical Partition Definition g. The next screen allows you to specify if this partition will be part of a workload management group. At the time of this writing, a workload management application does not exist for Linux. Select No and then Next to continue as seen in Figure Figure 6-36 Workload Management Group h. The next screen asks you for a partition profile name as seen in Figure This profile specifies resources and settings for a partition including memory, processors and I/O allocations. Enter your partition profile name. Do not select to Use all the Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 305

320 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am resources in the system as this option is for i5/os logical partitions only. Click Next to continue. Note: Selecting the option to Use all resources in the system will allow the logical partition to literally use all the resources in the system. If you have specified to use all the resources in the system, you will not be able to start any other logical partition at the same time due to a lack of available resources. Likewise, if you have a logical partition already active on your system and you attempt to start a logical partition that specifies to use all the system resources, it will not start since it cannot use all the system resources. Use this option if you are only going to have a single i5/os logical partition on your eserver i5. Figure 6-37 Partition Profile i. The next screen asks you for the memory allocation for the partition. Specify your minimum, desired and maximum memory requirements as seen in Figure Note how the first line is the allocation in GB and the second line is the allocation in MB. Click Next to continue. 306 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

321 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-38 Memory Allocation j. The next screen as seen in Figure 6-39 asks you to choose between Shared and Dedicated processors for your partition. Select your desired processor option and click Next to continue. Figure 6-39 Processor Specification k. If you chose Shared processors, you will need to input your desired processor specifications in the next screen as seen in Figure Specify the Desired, Minimum and Maximum processing units for this partition. For Dedicated processors, you get a similar screen; however, you are required to specify entire processors for your partitions. Click Next to continue. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 307

322 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-40 Processing Units l. Selecting the Advanced button will give you a screen as seen in Figure Here you can select Capped versus Uncapped processor sharing modes and setup the virtual processor settings. The default virtual processor settings will already be filled in, but you can change these settings as appropriate. If you are using the Uncapped sharing mode, you need to assign the partition a weight relative to the other uncapped partitions on your system. This weight is in the range of 0 to 255 with 255 being the highest weight. 128 is the default weight. Click OK to continue. 308 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

323 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-41 Advanced Processing Settings m. If you want your Linux server to use Native I/O resources, select them at the screen as seen in Figure Our example is using all virtual resources; thus, we do not select any I/O components for this partition. Click Next to continue. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 309

324 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-42 I/O Components n. I/O pools, as illustrated in Figure 6-43, are used for independent ASPs for i5/os partition. Click Next to continue. 310 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

325 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-43 I/O Pools o. In our case, we are using all virtual resources. If you are choosing to use any virtual resources for your logical partition, Select Yes, I want to specify virtual I/O adapters as seen in Figure 6-44 and click Next to continue. Figure 6-44 Virtual I/O Adapter p. The next screen as seen in Figure 6-45 shows the Number of virtual adapter slots and the two default Virtual Server Serial Adapters. The number of virtual adapter slots defaults to 10. If this logical partition requires more than 10 virtual adapters, change this number now. q. The two Server Serial adapters are required, do not remove them. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 311

326 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am r. From this screen you create the virtual adapters your Linux server needs. Click the desired Virtual Adapter (Ethernet, Serial, or SCSI) and then click Create. In our example, we create the ethernet virtual adapter first. Figure 6-45 Create ethernet Virtual I/O Adapters s. When Ethernet is selected, you get a screen as seen in Figure The Slot number and Port virtual LAN ID number are chosen for you. The Slot number can be changed as appropriate. However, the Port virtual LAN ID number must match the Port Virtual LAN ID number of the host logical partition s virtual ethernet adapter. i. To check the host logical partitions virtual ethernet adapter, go to your HMC screen. Select Server and Partition Server Management Partitions select the host logical partition. ii. Right click on the host logical partition and select Properties. iii. Select Virtual Adapters and Ethernet tabs on the Partition Properties screen. iv. Verify the Port Virtual LAN ID matches the Port virtual LAN ID of your Linux logical partition. If they do not match, change the Port virtual LAN ID of your Linux logical partition to match. v. Click OK to exit this window. t. Specify the trunk adapter and IEEE Q settings as required by your environment and click OK to continue. Note: To enable virtual communications between the hosting partition and the Linux partition, you must have a Virtual ethernet defined to the host logical partition using the same Port virtual LAN ID. You should verify the host logical partition virtual ethernet settings to ensure you have matching LAN IDs. 312 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

327 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-46 Virtual Ethernet Adapter Properties u. The Virtual Adapters screen lists the Virtual ethernet adapter you just created. Click the Required box next to the ethernet adapter as seen in Figure Figure 6-47 Virtual Adapters v. Our example now creates the Virtual SCSI connection. To do this, the host logical partition must have a Virtual Server SCSI I/O adapter. To create this, go back to your HMC screen but do not exit the screen above or the Create Logical Partition Wizard will stop and you will need to start creating the partition again from scratch. In the Navigation Area, open your target server, open Server and Partition, and then open Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 313

328 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Server Management. Select the partition profile of the logical partition that will host this Linux server. See Figure Figure 6-48 Host Partition w. Right click on the partition profile for the host logical partition and select Properties as seen in Figure Figure 6-49 Host Partition Profile Properties x. A window with the properties of that partition profile is shown. Select the Virtual I/O tab at the top of the window to get the listing of virtual adapters for this partition profile as seen in Figure Select SCSI and then Create. 314 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

329 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-50 Host Logical Partition - Create Virtual SCSI Adapter y. The Virtual SCSI Adapter Properties window as seen in Figure 6-51 is shown. The next available slot number will be filled in for you, but it can be changed as needed. i. Select Server for the Adapter Type. ii. You can specify either option for the Connection Information. Selecting Any remote partition and slot can connect allows any virtual client SCSI adapter to connect to this virtual server SCSI. However, a virtual server SCSI adapter can only connect to one virtual client SCSI adapter at a time. Selecting Only selected remote partition and slot can connect limits this virtual server SCSI to the specified remote partition and virtual slot. If selecting Any remote partition and slot can connect, then click OK to continue and go to step z on page 316 in these instructions. iii. If selecting Only selected remote partition and slot can connect option, input the remote logical partition name which is the name of your Linux logical partition. The remote partition virtual slot number cannot be inputted until the virtual client SCSI adapter is created. iv. Create your virtual client SCSI adapter and then come back to this screen to input the remote partition virtual slot number. See step aa on page 317 for creating the virtual client SCSI adapter. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 315

330 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-51 Host Partition Virtual SCSI Adapter Properties z. Once created, the virtual Server SCSI adapter appears in the list of virtual I/O adapters for the host logical partition as seen in Figure Select Required box for this adapter and click OK to continue. Note: The changes made to the hosting system s profiles will not take effect until after the partition is powered off and activated with the changed profile. 316 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

331 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-52 Host Partitions - Virtual Adapters aa.go back to your Create Logical Partition wizard and create the virtual client SCSI connection for your logical partition. Select SCSI and Create as seen in Figure Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 317

332 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-53 Virtual Adapters - Create SCSI Adapter ab.in the Virtual SCSI Adapter Properties, the Slot number will default to the next available slot. You can change this if needed. ac.put this number into the server SCSI properties for the host partition if you previously selected Only remote partition and remote slot can connect. ad.select Client as the Adapter Type and then select the Remote partition and the Remote partition virtual slot number. The remote partition is the host logical partition. The remote partition virtual slot number is the slot number of the server SCSI adapter previously setup for this partition. ae.see Figure Select OK to continue. 318 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

333 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-54 Virtual SCSI Adapter Properties af. As seen in Figure 6-55, the Client SCSI adapter appears in the list of Virtual I/O adapters for your partition. Select the Required box for this adapter and then Next to continue. Figure 6-55 Virtual Client SCSI Adapter ag.as seen in Figure the Create Logical Partition Profile - Power Controlling Partitions window appears. This allows you to select the logical partition that will have authority to power up/down your Linux logical partition. Select your host logical partition as the Power controlling partition to add and then click Add. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 319

334 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-56 Power Controlling Partition Setup ah.as seen in Figure 6-57, the host logical partition will now appear in the list. Only one power controlling partition is allowed. If you need to change this partition, select the logical partition listed and click Remove. Select the correct host logical partition and then click Add. Click Next to continue. 320 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

335 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-57 Power Controlling Partition ai. You can now change any optional settings for your Linux logical partition as seen in Figure Refer to Figure 3-48 on page 82 for details on these parameters. A typical setup will have the boot mode as Normal. For Linux logical partitions using any virtual I/O adapters, you do not want to select Automatically start with managed system. It is better to start the Linux server by varying on the NWSD. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 321

336 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-58 Partition Boot Mode aj. As seen in Figure 6-59, the Profile Summary provides a summary of the logical partition and partition profile about to be created. ak.review this screen. If any changes are required, select the Back key to get to the correct window to make the necessary changes. al. Clicking Finish creates the logical partition and the partition profile. am.if changes are necessary after the logical partition and partition profile have been created, you can do so by going back to the HMC screen and right-clicking on the logical partition or partition profile that needs modification. 322 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

337 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-59 Logical Partition - Creation Summary, an.you new logical partition and partition profile now appear on your HMC screen as seen in Figure Figure 6-60 New Partition Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 323

338 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am ao.now that your logical partition and partition profile are created, a virtual console for the Linux server needs to be created. This virtual console is created from your host logical partition, not the Linux logical partition. From your HMC screen, select your host partition as seen in Figure Figure 6-61 Host Partition - Virtual Console Creation ap.in our example, our host logical partition is already running and we do not want to restart it at this point in time to add a Virtual I/O adapter. We are going to use Dynamic Logical Partitioning to add the virtual Serial I/O adapter required for the virtual console. aq.as seen in Figure 6-62, select your host partition and right click. Select Dynamic Logical Partitioning, Virtual Adapter Resources and then Add/Remove. Figure 6-62 DLPAR - Adding a Virtual I/O Adapter 324 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

339 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm ar. The virtual I/O adapters already configured for your host partition will appear on the screen. Select the Serial button and Create to add another virtual adapter as seen in Figure Figure 6-63 Host Partition Virtual Adapters as.as seen in Figure 6-64, the next available slot number will be selected. Select Client as the adapter type, select your Linux logical partition as the Remote partition and insert the remote partition virtual slot number. This remote partition virtual slot number needs to be set to slot 0, the location of the Linux logical partition s serial server adapter. Select OK to continue. Note: There are 2 virtual server serial adapters that are automatically created with the logical partition. These are in slots 0 and 1. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 325

340 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-64 Dynamic LPAR - Virtual Serial Adapter at. As seen in Figure 6-65, the Client Serial connection appears in the list of virtual adapters for the host partition. Click OK. 326 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

341 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-65 Host Partition Virtual Adapters Note: Since we used Dynamic Logical Partitioning to add the virtual serial adapter to the host logical partition, the partition profile for this logical partition must also be changed to add this virtual serial adapter. If the partition profile is not updated, then the virtual serial adapter created using dynamic LPAR will be lost when the host logical partition IPLs. au.to update the partition profile, go to your HMC screen and select your host partition profile as seen in Figure Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 327

342 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-66 Updating Host Partition Profile av. Right click on the host partition profile and select Properties as seen in Figure Figure 6-67 Updating Host Partition Profile - Properties 328 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

343 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm aw.at the top of the Profile Properties screen, select Virtual I/O. A a listing of your current Virtual I/O adapters already configured for this partition profile is shown as seen in Figure Select Serial and then Create to create the virtual serial adapter. Figure 6-68 Creating Virtual Serial Adapter ax.when creating this virtual serial adapter for the partition profile, make sure to input the same parameters as you did when you created the virtual serial adapter dynamically as seen in Figure Select OK to continue. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 329

344 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-69 Creating Virtual Serial Adapter ay. Your virtual serial adapter now shows up in the list of virtual I/O adapters created for your host logical partition as seen in Figure When this partition reboots, the partition profile will ensure this virtual serial connection is available. Select OK to continue. 330 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

345 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-70 Virtual I/O Adapter Listing 15.Now that you have the logical partition and partition profile created, the NWSD needs to be created on your host logical partition. a. The first boot-up of your Linux server needs to be done from the Installation CD. Locate your SLES 9 installation CDs and insert the first one into the CD or DVD drive. b. Consult the distributor s installation documentation to ensure the correct path and file name for the IPLSTMF parameter. c. If you prefer to using iseries Navigator to create the NWSD, refer to i/5 OS side configuration steps on page 85. Else from your 5250 session, type CRTNWSD on the command line and F4 to prompt the command. Enter parameters as seen below. CRTNWSD NWSD(servername) RSRCNAME(*AUTO) TYPE(*GUEST) PARTITION(partitionname) CODEPAGE(437) TCPPORTCFG(*NONE) RSTDDEVRSC(*NONE) SYNCTIME(*TYPE) IPLSRC(*STMF) IPLSTMF('/QOPT/SU90.001/install') IPLPARM(*None) PWRCTL(*YES) TEXT('Linux Sles 9 Migrated Server') 16.The WRKNWSD command now shows your newly created NWSD. 17.Link the NWSSTG that you FTPed and restored from your eserver iseries system to this new NWSD. ADDNWSSTGL NWSSTG(nwsstgname) NWSD(servername) DYNAMIC(*YES) DRVSEQNBR(*CALC) Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 331

346 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 18.Do WRKHDWRSC *CMN on your host logical partition and locate the virtual SCSI resources. The virtual SCSI resource are listed with a type of 290B as seen for CTL04 and CTL03 in Figure Work with Communication Resources Type options, press Enter. 5=Work with configuration descriptions System: 7=Display resource detail RCHAS10 Opt Resource Type Status Text CMN11 268C Operational Ethernet Port CTL03 290B Operational Comm Adapter LIN11 6B04 Operational Comm Adapter CMN13 6B04 Operational Comm Port CTL04 290B Operational Comm Adapter Figure 6-71 WRKHDWRSC 19.Take option 7 Display resource detail next to the virtual SCSI resource as seen in Figure Option 7 gives you the details for that resource. Match the adapter number of that virtual SCSI resource to the slot number of the host logical partition s Virtual Server SCSI Adapter. Work with Communication Resources Type options, press Enter. 5=Work with configuration descriptions System: 7=Display resource detail RCHAS10 Opt Resource Type Status Text CMN11 268C Operational Ethernet Port CTL03 290B Operational Comm Adapter LIN11 6B04 Operational Comm Adapter CMN13 6B04 Operational Comm Port 7 CTL04 290B Operational Comm Adapter Figure 6-72 Display Resource Detail 20.As seen in Figure 6-73, resource CTL04 has an adapter number of 7. That number matches the adapter number of the host logical partition s Virtual Server SCSI Adapter that we configured to be used for the Linux partition as seen in Figure Make note of this resource name as it is needed to make changes to the NWSD in upcoming steps. 332 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

347 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Display Resource Detail Resource name : CTL04 Text : Comm Adapter Type-model : 290B-001 Serial number : Part number : Location: U A36C-V4-C7 Logical address: SPD bus: System bus 255 System board 0 System card 0 Communications: I/O bus 208 Adapter 7 Figure 6-73 WRKHDWRSC Details For Virtual SCSI Adapter Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 333

348 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 6-74 Host Partition Virtual SCSI Adapter 21.Change your NWSD to use the resource name of the Virtual SCSI adapter instead of *AUTO. CHGNWSD NWSD(servername) RSRCNAME(CTL04) 22.To create the Virtual ethernet connection for your Linux server, locate the Virtual ethernet resource via the WRKHDWRSC *CMN command on your host logical partition. Look for a resource with a type of 268C as seen in Figure Use the resource labeled as Ethernet Port to create the Virtual ethernet connection. In our example, the resource to use is CMN Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

349 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Work with Communication Resources Type options, press Enter. 5=Work with configuration descriptions System: 7=Display resource detail RCHAS10 Opt Resource Type Status Text CMB02 268C Operational Combined function IOP LIN01 6B03 Operational Comm Adapter CMN01 6B03 Operational Comm Port LIN02 6B03 Operational Comm Adapter CMN02 6B03 Operational Comm Port CTL02 290B Operational Comm Adapter LIN08 268C Operational LAN Adapter CMN10 268C Operational Ethernet Port Figure 6-75 Virtual ethernet Resources 23.Create your virtual ethernet line specifying the correct resource name, a line speed of 1G, a duplex of *Full and a maximum frame size of The maximum frame size of 8996 will improve data transfer across the virtual LAN. CRTLINETH LIND(VIRTETH) RSRCNAME(CMN10) LINESPEED(1G) DUPLEX(*FULL) MAXFRAME(8996) TEXT('Virtual Ethernet Connection') 24.Vary on the ethernet line you just created. VRYCFG CFGOBJ(VIRTETH) CFGTYPE(*LIN) STATUS(*ON) Note: Depending on the method you have chosen for communications between the virtual LAN and the external LAN, these next steps may differ. Our example that follows uses the Proxy ARP method. 25.Enable IP Datagram Forwarding on your host logical partition. This is part of the TCP/IP attributes. CHGTCPA IPDTGFWD(*YES) 26.Create the TCP/IP interface for the external LAN on your host logical partition specifying the external TCP/IP address, the line description associated with the physical ethernet adapter, and the subnet mask of your external LAN. ADDTCPIFC INTNETADR(' ') LIND(ETHLINE) SUBNETMASK(' ') 27.Start this IP interface STRTCPIFC INTNETADR( ) 28.Create the TCP/IP interface for the virtual LAN on your host logical partition specifying the TCP/IP address of your Linux server, the line description associated with the virtual ethernet adapter, and the subnet mask of the virtual LAN. ADDTCPIFC INTNETADR( ) LIND(VIRTETH) SUBNETMASK( ) LCLIFC( ) 29.Start the IP Interface STRTCPIFC INTNETADR( ) 30.Create the default route to enable packets to exit the virtual ethernet LAN specifying a route destination of *dftroute, a subnet mask of *none, and a nexthop address associated with your IP router or gateway. ADDTCPRTE RTEDEST(*DFTROUTE) SUBNETMASK(*NONE) NEXTHOP( ) Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 335

350 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 31.Verify the first SLES9 installation CD is in the CD or DVD drive. Start a PuTTY session to newly created Linux logical partition. Vary on the NWSD. VRYCFG CFGOBJ(servername) CFGTYPE(*NWS) STATUS(*ON) 32.The NWSD may go to a failed status. Do not vary it off or vary it on at this point and do not end your PuTTY session. Go to your HMC and select the partition profile for the Linux logical partition as seen in Figure Figure 6-76 Partition Profile 33.Right click on the partition profile and select Activate as seen in Figure Figure 6-77 Activating the Partition Profile 336 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

351 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm 34.You may get a window as seen in Figure 6-78 to confirm your choice of partition profiles to activate. Click OK. Figure 6-78 Activating the Partition Profile 35.Your NWSD may still be in a failed status, but your PuTTY session should now take off. 36.You are prompted to choose install or install32 from your PuTTY session as seen in Figure Choose install to boot the pseries 64bit kernel. Figure 6-79 Boot From SLES 9 Installation CD 37.You are asked for the type of terminal you are using. Make the appropriate choice. 38.You are then taken into the YaST tool. Select I Agree to the Novell License Agreement and then select the language of choice and then click Accept. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 337

352 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 39.As seen in Figure 6-80, you are given a menu of Installation Settings. Select Boot installed system and then select OK. Figure 6-80 Boot Installed System 40.The boot of the installed system will fail because the settings in the /etc/fstab are incorrect for this eserver i5 hardware. A Linux recovery system starts instead- login into this system at your PuTTY session. You need to use the password for the root user of your Linux server as seen in Figure Steps that follow will show you how to make the correct changes to the /etc/fstab file for your Linux server. 338 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

353 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure 6-81 Linux Recovery System 41.Now that you are logged in, remount the root partition. Enter the following command at your PuTTY session replacing the variables with the correct parameters for your server: mount -t <your FS type> -o remount,rw <your root device> / For our Linux server example, reiserfs is our file system type and our root device is /dev/iseries/vda3. See Figure linux:~ # mount -t reiserfs -o remount,rw /dev/iseries/vda3/ Figure 6-82 Mount Root Partition To determine your root device, enter the following command at your PuTTY session as seen in Figure 6-83 df linux:~ # df Filesystem 1K-blocks Used Available Use% Mounted on /dev/iseries/vda % / tmpfs % /dev/shm Figure 6-83 Determining Root Device Note: if the mount command does not work as stated above, reissue the command without the -t reiserfs. Example: mount -r remount,rw /dev/iseries/vda3/ 42.Now that you have remounted the root partition, edit the /etc/fstab file giving it the correct settings. At your PuTTY session, enter the vi command as seen in Figure Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 339

354 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am linux:~ # vi /etc/fstab Figure 6-84 Editing /etc/fstab a. Use the table in Table 6-1 to make the correct changes to the /etc/fstab file. Replace the previous virtual device names with the new virtual device names. Table 6-1 Virtual device name changes Virtual Device Previous Name New Name Virtual disk /dev/iseries/vdxxx /dev/sdxxx Virtual CD or DVDRAM /dev/iseries/vcdxxx /dev/srxxx Virtual tape /dev/iseries/vtxxx /dev/stxxx b. Save the changes to the /etc/fstab file by entering :wq! c. Figure 6-85 and Figure 6-86 are the before and after images of the /etc/fstab file in our example. line /dev/iseries/vda3 was changed to /dev/sda3 line /dev/iseries/vda2 was changed to /dev/sda2 line /dev/iseries/vcdc was changed to /dev/src /dev/iseries/vda3 / reiserfs defaults 1 1 /dev/iseries/vda2 swap swap pri= devpts /dev/pts devpts mode=0620,gid=5 0 0 proc /proc proc defaults 0 0 /dev/cdrom /media/cdrom subfs fs=cdfss,ro,procuid,nosuid,nodev,exec 0 0 /dev/iseries/vcda /media/dvdram subfs fs=cdfss,ro,procuid,nosuid,nodev,exec,iocharset=utf8 0 0 /dev/iseries/vcdc /media/cdrom11 subfs fs=cdfss,ro,procuid,nosuid,nodev,exec,iocharset=utf8 0 0 usbfs /proc/bus/usb usbfs noauto 0 Figure 6-85 /etc/fstab File - before changes /dev/sda3 / reiserfs defaults 1 1 /dev/sda2 swap swap pri= devpts /dev/pts devpts mode=0620,gid=5 0 0 proc /proc proc defaults 0 0 /dev/cdrom /media/cdrom subfs fs=cdfss,ro,procuid,nosuid,nodev,exec 0 0 /dev/iseries/vcda /media/dvdram subfs fs=cdfss,ro,procuid,nosuid,nodev,exec,iocharset=utf8 0 0 /dev/src /media/cdrom11 subfs fs=cdfss,ro,procuid,nosuid,nodev,exec,iocharset=utf8 0 0 usbfs /proc/bus/usb usbfs noauto 0 Figure 6-86 /etc/fstab File - after changes 43.Edit the /etc/inittab file and change the iseries virtual console settings. From your PuTTY session, enter the vi command as seen in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

355 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm linux:~ # vi /etc/inittab Figure 6-87 Editing /etc/inittab file a. Locate the line with the heading of iseries virtual console. If you do not have this heading, locate the line containing 1:2345:respawn:/sbin/agetty -L console. Figure 6-88 is an excerpt of the /etc/inittab file before changes are made. # iseries virtual console: 1:2345:respawn:/sbin/agetty -L console # to allow only root to log in on the console, use this: # 1:2345:respawn:/sbin/sulogin /dev/console # to disable authentication on the console, use this: # y:2345:respawn:/bin/bash Figure 6-88 Excerpt of /etc/inittab - before changes b. Comment out the iseries virtual console line. If this line is listed more than once in the file, comment out all occurrences of it. c. Add hvc0:1235:respawn:/sbin/agetty -L 9600 hvc0 vt320 as the next line d. Figure 6-89 is an excerpt of the /etc/inittab file after the changes are made. # iseries virtual console: #1:2345:respawn:/sbin/agetty -L console hvc0:1235:respawn:/sbin/agetty -L 9600 hvc0 vt320 Figure 6-89 Excerpt of /etc/inittab - after changes e. Save the changes to the /etc/inittab file by entering :wq! 44.Edit the /etc/securetty file to include an entry for hvc0. From your PuTTY session, enter the vi command as seen in Figure linux:/ # vi /etc/securetty Figure 6-90 Editing /etc/securetty file a. Figure 6-91 is an excerpt of the /etc/securetty file before changes are made. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 341

356 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am # This file contains the device names of tty lines (one per line, # without leading /dev/) on which root is allowed to login. # tty1 tty2 tty3 tty4 tty5 tty6 # for devfs: vc/1 vc/2 vc/3 vc/4 vc/5 vc/6 console console console ~ Figure 6-91 /etc/securetty file - before changes b. Add a new line to the file that states hvc0. c. Save the changes to the /etc/securetty file by entering :wq! d. Figure 6-92 has the /etc/securetty file with the changes. # # This file contains the device names of tty lines (one per line, # without leading /dev/) on which root is allowed to login. # tty1 tty2 tty3 tty4 tty5 tty6 # for devfs: vc/1 vc/2 vc/3 vc/4 vc/5 vc/6 console console console hvc0 Figure 6-92 /etc/securetty file - after changes 45.The Linux server needs to be restarted at this point for these file changes to take effect. Vary off and then vary on the NWSD from your iseries host logical partition. Because the NWSD has not changed yet, the Linux server boots again from the installation CD. VRYCFG CFGOBJ(servername) CFGTYPE(*NWS) STATUS(*OFF) 342 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

357 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm VRYCFG CFGOBJ(servername) CFGTYPE*(NWS) STATUS(*ON) 46.Repeat steps 36 on page 337 to 39 on page 338 to restart the Linux server from the installation CD 47.Check the Linux distributor s documentation to determine if any new modules need to be installed for the eserver i5 system you are now running on. Note: At this point in time, you can ignore any network error messages. 48.Once the Linux server has restarted, login again. Now that you are running on the eserver i5 hardware, SLES9 requires changes to use virtual SCSI adapters instead of IDE emulation as on the previous iseries hardware. This change is done by editing the /etc/sysconfig/kernel file. From your PuTTY session, type the vi command as seen Figure linux:~ # vi /etc/sysconfig/kernel Figure 6-93 Editing /etc/sysconfig/kernel 49.Change The INITRD_MODULES line of this file to ibmvscsic. Remove viodasd if is listed with this line. See Figure 6-94 for an after image view of the /etc/sysconfig/kernel file. ## Path: System/Kernel ## Description: ## Type: string ## Command: /sbin/mkinitrd # # This variable contains the list of modules to be added to the initial # ramdisk by calling the script "mk_initrd" # (like drivers for scsi-controllers, for lvm or reiserfs) # INITRD_MODULES="ibmvscsic" ## Type: integer # # Size parameter for mounting the shmfs filesystem. The kernel defaults # to 50% of the available RAM size, but this might not be enough for # some special setups. # SHMFS_SIZE="" ## Type: string ## ServiceRestart: boot.loadmodules Figure 6-94 /etc/sysconfig/kernel Changes 50.Save the changes to the /etc/sysconfig file by entering :wq!. 51.The /etc/lilo.conf file also needs modifications at this point. From your PuTTY session, type the vi command as seen in Figure linux:~ # vi /etc/lilo.conf Figure 6-95 /etc/lilo.conf Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 343

358 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am a. Change the boot line to boot=<path to your PReP boot partition> b. Change the root line to root=<path to your root partition> c. Add activate under the boot lines d. Delete any extra boot lines listed near the top of the file e. Save the changes to the /etc/lilo.conf file by entering :wq!. f. Figure 6-96 and Figure 6-97 are the before and after images of the /etc/lilo.conf file in our example. # Modified by YaST2. Last modification on Fri Jul 23 07:53: default = linux timeout = 100 boot = B boot = /dev/iseries/sda1 boot = /boot/suse_linux_bootfile image = /boot/vmlinux ###Don't change this comment - YaST2 identifier: Original name: linux### label = linux root = "" initrd = /boot/initrd append = "selinux=0 elevator=cfq Figure 6-96 /etc/lilo.conf Before Changes # Modified by YaST2. Last modification on Fri Jul 23 07:53: default = linux timeout = 100 boot = /dev/sda1 activate image = /boot/vmlinux ###Don't change this comment - YaST2 identifier: Original name: linux### label = linux root = "/dev/sda3" initrd = /boot/initrd append = "selinux=0 elevator=cfq Figure 6-97 /etc/lilo.conf After Changes 52.Linux file changes are now complete. 53.Now the pseries Linux kernel needs to be installed. From your PuTTY session, type the command as seen in Figure linux:~ # rpm -Uvh kernel-pseries ppc.rpm Figure 6-98 Installing the pseries kernel 54.At your PuTTY session, you see the pseries kernel image being prepared and updates being made. 344 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

359 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm 55.From your HMC, shut down the Linux logical partition. Select your Linux logical partition as seen in Figure Figure 6-99 Linux Logical Partition 56.Right click on the Linux logical partition and select ShutDown Partition as seen in Figure Figure Linux Logical Partition ShutDown Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 345

360 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 57.From your host logical partition 5250 screen, vary off and change your Linux NWSD to start from NWSSTG instead of the installation CDs. The IPLPARM is the path to the linux partition containing your Linux kernel. In our example, that path is dev/sda3. VRYCFG CFGOBJ(servername) CFGTYPE(*NWS) STATUS(*OFF) CHGNWSD NWSD(servername) IPLSRC(*NWSSTG) IPLSTMF(*NONE) IPLPARM( root=/dev/sda3 ) 58.Restart your Linux server by varying on the NWSD VRYCFG CFGOBJ(servername) CFGTYPE(*NWS) STATUS(*ON) 59.If you look at your HMC screen, you should see your Linux logical partition in a starting status as seen in Figure Figure Linux startup after migration 60.When the Linux server has completed its startup, your Linux logical partition will be in a running state and the pseries kernel will be listed under the Operator Panel Value as seen in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

361 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Figure Linux Logical Partition Status 61.At this point, we encourage you to install the DynamicRM and Error Log Analysis RPMs. Details of these RPMs can be found in Section 4.6, Post installation steps: Linux DynamicRM and error log analysis RPMs on page 183. At a minimum, install the DiagELA RPMs from the error log analysis RPMs. If you are planning on using any of the dynamic logical partitioning functionality, install both the DynamicRM and the Error Log Analysis RPMs. DynamicRM Install the RMC framework first. Install the rdist package from SLES 9 s package management utility in YaST2 Install the RPMs in the following order: src rsct.core.utils rsct.core csm.core csm.client devices.chrp.base.servicerm DynamicRM Verify the HMC can properly communicate with the logical partition using RMC. Right click on the logical partition. Click Shut Down Partition. If all the options are selectable, then the HMC is successfully communicating with the logical partition via RMC. Error log analysis The RPMs required are: librtas Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 347

362 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am diagela 62.After the RPMs have been installed, reboot your Linux server. 63.Verify your applications are operating normally. 64.We recommend you save your migrated Linux server once you have confirmed the server and applications are operating normally. 65.You now have successfully completed your SLES 9 Linux server migration to eserver i5 hardware Migration troubleshooting Following are some potential problems you may run into while migrating your SLES 9 Linux server to the eserver i5. We are assuming you had a working SLES 9 Linux server on legacy iseries before attempting the migration to eserver i5. To find more information, refer to the IBM Information Centers or place a call to your next level of support. IBM iseries Information Center (V5R3) IBM eserver Hardware Information Center Backing out Should you run into an unforeseen problems on the eserver i5 and are forced to return to the legacy iseries, you can do so relatively easily. Other than adding the pseries kernel to the existing NWSSTG on the legacy iseries, these instructions did not have you make any changes to that Linux server. 1. End the Linux server and the logical partition on the eserver i5 2. Ensure they are not set to autostart. Change any startup programs so that this Linux server and logical partition are not started on the eserver i5. 3. On the legacy iseries, restart the NWSD for the Linux server you attempted to migrate. 4. Reset the NWSD to autostart or change the startup programs to start this Linux server. Errors with varying on the NWSD If you encounter errors when varying on the NWSD, refer to Table 6-2 for some common error messages. These errors will be listed in QSYSOPR message queue on the host logical partition. Table 6-2 NWSD errors Reason code Code explanation Storage space not found. *NWSSTG was specified as the IPL source, but no storage space was found Partition not found. The partition specified in the PARTITION parameter was not found Partition not correct type. The partition specified in the PARTITION parameter is not a GUEST partition 348 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

363 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chmig.fm Reason code Code explanation Server already varied on for partition. There is already an NWSD in the i5/os partition that is active and using the partition specified in the PARTITION parameter of the NWSD Partition already active. The partition specified in the PARTITION parameter of the NWSD is powered on (perhaps through the LPAR configuration interface or from another i/os partition) A file system error occurred access the IPL stream file. The partition is set to start from a stream file (stmf) and for some reason that didn t work. You should note that the user performing the vary on needs read access to the IPL STMF parameter IPL source not valid. The NWSD is set to start from a storage space (NWSSTG), but for some reason the kernel could not be found. Some common reasons are no type 0x41 partition or not marked startable IPL of partition failed. The partition will not start. There are a variety of reasons why the partition will not start. You could have a corrupt kernel or the processor feature code does not support the shared processor pool. If the kernel and processor are not the problem, you need to look at the information for this partition and start reviewing the SRCs A host partition is not configured for this partition. The partition identified as the logical partition is not configured. To select a host partition, use the Work with Partition Status display and press F11 (Work with partition configuration). From the Partition configuration display, select option 13 next to the partition to assign the partition a host A network server storage space linked to this network server is damaged. Contact your next level of support to find a proper solution to the problem Invalid resource name. The resource name you selected in the RSRCNAME parameter is not valid. Use the Work with Hardware Resources (WRKHDWRSC) command with the TYPE(*CMN) parameter to help determine the correct resource name Resource name does not match partition. The resource name you selected in the RSRCNAME parameter exists, but is not in the partition you specified. Use the Work with Hardware Resources (WRKHDWRSC) command with the TYPE(*CMN) parameter to help determine the resource name in the partition you specified Unable to determine partition for resource name. Either specify a partition directly or update the resource definition at the HMC to indicate the client partition A B C A A AA Unknown error occurred. Contact your next level of support to find a proper solution to the problem. The kernel does not appear to be valid. This error is frequently caused if you do not FTP the kernel in binary mode. The kernel does not appear to be compatible with the version of OS/400 in the primary partition. There is an insufficient amount of processors assigned to the partition or there are not enough shared processors available. Chapter 6. Linux migration from iseries to eserver i5 349

364 6388chmig.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Reason code A A AE Code explanation There is an insufficient amount of memory available for the partition. This error will occur on servers that only support dedicated processors when either you have specified a shared processor for a Linux partition or you have the QPRCMLTTSK server value set to 1. SRCs You may need to refer to the distribution documentation or contact your next level of support if you are getting SRCs when varying on your Linux server. To obtain more information regarding the SRC: From your HMC, open Server and Partition Server Management choose your managed system Partitions select your Linux logical partition. Right click on your Linux logical partition and select Properties. From the Partition Properties screen, select the Reference Code tab. You can change the number of reference codes that are displayed in the View history field. You can select any reference code that is displayed and then click Details to see the hex words for that reference code. 350 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

365 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm 7 Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux iseries Access for Linux is the latest offering in the iseries Access product line. iseries Access for Linux allows you to access the DB2 UDB for iseries using its ODBC Driver and to establish a 5250 session to an iseries server from a Linux client. In this chapter we cover the following items: iseries Access for Linux overview iseries Access for Linux requirements Installation procedure ODBC configuration 5250 configuration Copyright IBM Corp All rights reserved. 351

366 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 7.1 iseries Access for Linux product overview iseries Access for Linux is the latest offering in the iseries Access (5722-XW1) family of products. It offers Linux-based access to iseries servers. iseries Access for Linux enables users to leverage business information, applications, and resources across an enterprise by extending the iseries resources to the Linux client iseries Access for Linux product features iseries Access for Linux consists of two product features. iseries ODBC Driver: Linux applications written to the ODBC API can use this driver to access DB2 UDB for iseries. The iseries ODBC Driver is based on the ODBC driver in iseries ODBC Driver for Windows formerly known as Client Access Express for Windows. It uses the iseries database Host Servers as the access point to the system. The driver communicates with the server via a socket connection. Some examples of using this driver for Linux applications accessing data stored in i5/os side include: OpenOffice applications integrating DB2 UDB for iseries data PHP applications serving various webpages Command line applications like isql for interactive SQL requests and cwbrunsql for running batch SQL scripts DMII: DataManagerII is a GUI application to view and manage data sources Any client server style application The 5250 emulator: It provides function equivalent to an IBM 5250 terminal. The emulator also provides extended 5250 terminal functions similar to those provided by IBM PC5250 emulator. The emulator supports the following functions: Customizable multi-session support up to 99 sessions Customizable menu bar/pull downs Best Fit Fonts: User can select from a list of fonts or when the window border is dragged the font will resize to the font that fits the best Maximize window support Remember initial window placement and font Saving a desktop file for window placement and font if initial geometry is not defined On-line help Keyboard remapping Session level color mapping Record/playback User-customizable pop-up and pull down keypads Auto-start of playback file Auto-logon using playback file Copy/cut/paste 24x80 and 27x132 screen size support Dynamic window management for screen size changes (27x132) Settable 5250 display names 352 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

367 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm Screen print to Postscript printers (parallel, serial, remote) Monochrome, grey scale, and color image/fax viewing and printing; 3489 emulation DP mode (normal 5250 mode) support of primary and foreground color extended attributes Easily changed Enter/Field Exit key locations Customizable automatic Help key on operator error Fixed hot spots: menu, function key, More, Enter key emulation (customizable: off, single click, or double click; also URL hot spots are recognized) Hot spot highlighting option Cursor style options: block/underscore and blink/no blink Rule line Row/column indicator Shift and Caps Lock indicators Customizable window title Column separator customization Type-ahead customization Session ID to identify a session (similar to IBM PC5250 emulator session short name) Automatic, customizable, communication error recovery Auto-disconnect option after specified inactivity time iseries Access for Linux facts sheet This section covers the topics which are related to this product. Platform choice You can run this product either on Linux partition on i5 or on Integrated xseries solutions such as Integrated xseries Server (IXS) or xseries servers connected via Integrated xseries Adapter (IXA). When you run it on Linux partition, you use POWER 5 platform version. When you run it on IXS/IXA, you use Intel platform version. Product architecture The current product is 32-bit Intel and POWER 5 implementation. License requirements You need the license of IBM iseries Access Family (5722-XW1) for 5250 emulation. You do not need it for using the ODBC driver. Licensing rules for iseries Access for Linux are same as iseries Access for Windows. Note: You can get to iseries Access for Linux home site at: iseries Access for Linux requirements This section lists the requirements for iseries Access for Linux even before its installation. 1. You need a License of IBM iseries Access Family (5722-XW1) only for 5250 emulation. Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 353

368 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 2. Enable the QUSER user profile. Use the following procedure to verify the user profile status. On 5250 command entry screen, type: DSPUSRPRF USRPRF(QUSER) This command shows the status of QUSER which should be *ENABLED. If the status is *DISABLED, type: CHGUSRPRF USRPRF(QUSER) STATUS(*ENABLED) 3. TCP/IP should be up and running on your i5/os. 4. Start the host servers service in i5/os. To start it, type: STRHOSTSVR *ALL 5. On Linux partition, you need the following packages installed: a. glibc 2.2 or later: This package is the GNU C Library. It contains the most important standards libraries as C, math and POSIX. b. RPM 3.0 or later: RPM Package Manager manages the software packages. With it you can install, remove and update software packages. Note: Requirements of glibc 2.2 or later and RPM 3.0 or later are part of a base Linux install. c. openmotif 2.0 or later: Openmotif is a runtime environment. This software is necessary for 5250 emulator. To check if it s installed, type: rpm -qa grep openmotif If the system returns you the line(s) of its package, it is installed. d. unixodbc driver manager version or later: This software provides a complete ODBC solution for the Linux platforms. To check if it is installed, type: rpm -qa grep unixodbc To get more information or download the latest level of unixodbc driver manager go to: e. Fonts: In order to display 5250 emulation screens properly, ibm5250 which is an application providing 5250 emulation requires fixed, mono-spaced 75dpi and 100dpi fonts. In order to display the largest font for all screen resolutions the 75dpi and 100dpi fonts are required. Note: To test for 75dpi or 100dpi, type: rpm -qa grep 100dpi Some Linux distributions will not install the 100dpi fonts by default. Scalable fonts will fill most of the screen but are considered by some to be fuzzy or not as sharp as fixed fonts. The emulator will automatically detect and use scalable fonts if they are available. To configure your system for scalable fonts: i. Examine the X configuration file. In SLES 9, it is /etc/x11/fs/config. First check if FontPath is used. If the FontPath contains a line similar to the line below, then you are using a font server and will need to edit the font server config file: FontPath "Unix/:7100" By default, it is commented out so we are not using it. 354 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

369 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm ii. If FontPath is not used, which means you are not using a font server, then the following lines of the X configuration file take effect: /usr/x11r6/lib/x11/fonts/75dpi:unscaled, /usr/x11r6/lib/x11/fonts/100dpi:unscaled, unscaled at the end of the lines mean you are suing unscaled fonts. To switch to scalable, remove the :unscaled so that those lines with selected dpi will look as: /usr/x11r6/lib/x11/fonts/75dpi, /usr/x11r6/lib/x11/fonts/100dpi, 7.3 Installing iseries Access for Linux The following procedure guides you to install iseries Access for Linux. 1. Download the iseries Access for Linux RPM package from: Save the file in your PC s temp directory then transfer it to Linux using FTP. 2. Use the Package Manager (RPM) to install the iseries Access for Linux. On Linux terminal, type: rpm -ivh iseriesaccess xx.xx.ppc.rpm where the XX.XX indicates the version level of the iseries Access as we shown in Figure 7-1. Figure 7-1 RPM Installing iseries Access for Linux Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 355

370 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Note: The files are installed in /opt/ibm/iseriesaccess directory. This installation deletes automatically older versions of iseries ODBC Driver if you had any. For logging information run the rpm with -vv parameter at the end of the command such as: rpm -ivh iseriesaccess xx.xx.ppc.rpm -vv To update run the rpm command with -Uvh option such as: rpm -Uvh iseriesaccess xx.xx.ppc.rpm To uninstall run the rpm command with -ev option such as: rpm -ev iseriesaccess xx.xx.ppc.rpm If the installation fails because of a dependency on libodbc.so or by other library, make sure that you have installed unixodbc driver manager. If the problem persists run the installation with the --nodeps parameter to stop the dependency checking: rpm -ivh iseriesaccess xx.xx.ppc.rpm --nodeps 3. Test the installation with the cwbping command as illustrated in Figure 7-2. This command pings to the i5/os server, in our case as pointed by the IP address of Successful returns of ping verifies the communication link between two partitions is established. Figure 7-2 cwbping command 356 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

371 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm Note: The cwbping command is installed into /opt/ibm/iseriesaccess/bin. To execute cwbping from any directory, your PATH shell variable will need to have an entry for /opt/ibm/iseriesacess/bin. Other useful commands such as ibm5250 to start a 5250 emulation session, or rmtcmd to run i5/os command. 7.4 ODBC configuration There are two options for configuring the iseries ODBC driver - using the graphical tool ODBCConfig and editing the odbc.ini configuration file. The GUI tool ODBCConfig is modeled closely on Microsoft s ODBC administrator and is the best choice for those that works with ODBC in a Microsoft environment ODBCConfig: GUI method of ODBC configuration A data source can be configured using the ODBC data source graphical user interface (GUI). This GUI contains fields to set required and frequently used options. The following instructions describe how to create or configure an iseries ODBC Driver for Linux Data Source Name (DSN). Note: ODBCConfig, or whatever different name your Linux operating system version might use, is not required but if you need it, you might need to install it. In case of SLES 9, ODBCConfig is the name used for this GUI configuration tool for ODBC setting and it comes as installed in the distribution. 1. Go to a GUI Linux terminal such as a VNC session. Open the Data Source Administrator that comes with the unixodbc driver manager. Execute ODBCConfig in Linux terminal or N System Configuration unixodbc configuration on KDE environment as illustrated in Figure 7-3. Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 357

372 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 7-3 KDE Opening unixodbc configuration Note: Depending on your environment setup, your Linux system might not find ODBCConfig command from the current user path setting. If this is the case, you need to find its location first. 2. Decide what type of data source you want to use. User DSN are only accessible by the user who created them. System DSN are accessible by any user on the machine. The System DSN is configured by root user. In our example click on System DSN to create a new System DSN as illustrated in Figure 7-4. Figure 7-4 ODBC Data Source Administrator 358 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

373 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm 3. Click Add to create a new data source or Configure if you want to configure a data source that already exists. In our example we add a new system DSN as we illustrate in Figure 7-5. Figure 7-5 ODBC Data Source Administrator - System DSN 4. Select an ODBC driver. Click on iseries Access ODBC Driver and click the OK button as illustrated in Figure 7-6. Figure 7-6 Add DSN 5. Configure your DSN properties. All the default values should work fine. Fill in the data source name in the Name field and your system name in the System field. All other fields are optional. We provide an example on Figure 7-7. Click OK button to save the configuration. Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 359

374 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 7-7 ODBC Config 6. Then the Data Source Administrator shows the new system DSN as illustrated in Figure 7-8. Click the X in the upper-right corner of the window to exit. 360 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

375 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm Figure 7-8 ODBC Data Source Administrator - New DSN added Note: The System DSN information is stored on /etc/unixodbc/odbc.ini Editing odbc.ini: Text mode of ODBC configuration Some of the driver connection options are not available via the ODBCConfig GUI. In this case, you will need to edit an.odbc.ini file. In this case we will work with a user DSN and the odbc.ini file associated. See the full list of connection options at: Follow these steps to manually add connection options to the.odbc.ini file: 1. Create an.odbc.ini file in your home directory. In our example, the user is teresa so ODBC configuration file we create will be /home/teresa/.odbc.ini. Using your text editor of choice, create this file with the contents as illustrated in Figure 7-9. In our case, we used kwrite tool which is a GUI editor. If you want to create multiple ODBC data sources in the.odbc.ini file, locate the section in the data source where you want to add the connection options. Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 361

376 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 7-9 Kwrite - editing.odbc.ini file 2. You can add rows to modify the default behavior of the driver at run time. For example, the default date format is 5 which is yyyy-mm-dd or *ISO. If you want to change this format to 1 which is mm/dd/yy or *MDY, add a new row after the last entry in the data source and enter the new connection option and its value in the syntax of "keyword = value". The entry we have is "DFT = 1" as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

377 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm Figure 7-10 Kwrite - Changing ODBC connection options 3. To save the.odbc.ini click con File Save as illustrated in Figure Figure 7-11 Kwrite - Saving Changes Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 363

378 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Note: Do not add multiple entries for the same connection option to a section for a specific data source. This can lead to unpredictable behavior. After manually editing the registry you can still use ODBCConfig to configure your data source. Older versions of the unixodbc driver manager version had a problem where manually added options were removed from the odbc.ini file when ODBCConfig was used to configure the data source. If you experience this problem, install a newer version of the unixodbc driver manager. Options specified by the application in the connection string override any options specified in the.odbc.ini file. 7.5 Connecting with DB2 UDB for iseries There are a lot of environments where you can use iseries Access ODBC Driver. Some examples are: Using isql: This is a small sample application that comes with unixodbc and can be useful to test queries or extract data in batch mode to a delimited file. It also can be used to generate results wrapped in HTML. Data ManagerII: It is a GUI application which allows the user to view and manage data sources. It comes with unixodbc driver manager package. Client Server applications: Using C applications that can fetch an ordinary database file from a back-end i5/os using the iseries ODBC driver for Linux. On three tier applications: Those are common in webpages. It uses a PHP module that provides built-in ODBC functions and access to DB2 UDB for iseries. Note: We use a sample database which we created on i5/os side running the following SQL statement: CALL QSYS.CREATE_SQL_SAMPLE('dbsample'); where you can give any name of your choice instead of dbsample. This will create a collection with sample tables which come with DB2 UDB for iseries itself isql Note: The isql is a command line application for interactive SQL requests processing. The iseries Access for Linux is also shipped with a tool called cwbrunsql that allows running SQL scripts in batch mode. To check your ODBC configuration open a Linux terminal and execute the following procedure: 1. Export the DBSAMPLE variable as we illustrate in Figure teresa@linuxi5new:~> export DB2INSTANCE=dbsample teresa@linuxi5new:~> Figure 7-12 Exporting instance 364 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

379 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm 2. Then connect to the database using your user and password in our example the user is fredyc and the password is t3r3s1ta as we illustrate in Figure Note: The user and password are from i5/os. isql -v dbsample fredyc t3r3s1ta Connected! sql-statement help [tablename] quit SQL> Figure 7-13 Connecting to DB2 UDB for iseries 3. This will bring you to a SQL> prompt where you can execute SQL queries. Execute the following query: select empno,lastname,sex,salary from employee orderby salary order by salary as we shown in Figure 7-14 Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 365

380 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am SQL> select empno,lastname,sex,salary from employee order by salary EMPNO LASTNAME SEX SALARY PARKER M SETRIGHT F MEHTA M WALKER M SCOUTTEN F JEFFERSON M PIANKA F WONG F SPENSER M SCHNEIDER F SCHWARTZ F PEREZ F ORLANDO M HENDERSON F LUTZ F JOHN F STERN M PULASKI F KWAN F HEMMINGER F HAAS F SQLRowCount returns rows fetched SQL> Figure 7-14 Executing SQL statements 4. Figure 7-15 shows an example of isql being used in batch mode. Notice that it is being told to run a similar query as Figure 7-14, but this time it is coming from a file (example.sql). linuxi5new:/www/htdocs # cat example.sql isql -v dbsample fredyc t3r3s1ta -b -w > employee.html linuxi5new:/www/htdocs # Figure 7-15 Isql - Running queries in batch mode 5. The results of this query are formatted into an HTML table and is sent to a new file (employee.html). Figure 7-16 illustrate the resulting html table. 366 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

381 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm Figure 7-16 Web browser - employee.html DataManagerII DataManagerII is a graphical tool for exploring Data sources. It allows to explore data sources in a similar manner as exploring file systems. In the following procedure we gives some steps to work with unixodbc DataManager: 1. On Linux KDE environment using konqueror, click on DataManagerII. This file can be found on the bin directory where your unixodbc is installed as illustrated in Figure Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 367

382 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 7-17 Konqueror - Opening DataManagerII 2. Click on System Data Sources DBSAMPLE. Then login to the i5/os as illustrated in Figure Figure 7-18 DataManagerII - Log in 368 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

383 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm 3. The DataManagerII has two panes. The left pane as illustrated in Figure 7-19, displays a Tree view. In this view you can see elements like tables, restriction keys, indexes and views. Figure 7-19 DataManagerII - General view 4. The right pane is the detail view. It shows any details that may be available for the selected item. In this view you can also execute sql command to do queries. Write an sql query as illustrated in Figure Click on the runner man to execute the query. Figure 7-20 DataManagerII - Executing queries 5. The results of the query are showed in Figure Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 369

384 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 7-21 DataManagerII - Query results Client server applications written in C The testodbc.c is a working example of an application fetching an ordinary database file (DBSAMPLE/EMPLOYEE) from a backend i5/os using the iseries ODBC driver for Linux. In this example we assume that unixodbc is installed, the iseries ODBC driver is installed, and that the target iseries database is registered as a data source in unixodbc. The command to compile this file is: # gcc -o testodbc -lodbc testodbc.c The -o switch outputs the testodbc executable. -lodbc links the ODBC libraries. The source code of testodbc is illustrated in Example 7-1. Example 7-1 testodbc.c /* Simple ODBC example for Linux on i5 or Linux generally. Pass in: datasourcename ("name" in ODBCConfig System or User or File DSN) validuserid password Thus: testodbc dbsample fredyc t3r3s1ta LWL, August 2004 */ #include <sql.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> /* Simple query to DB table very likely to exist. Takes first i5/os "member" */ char querystring[]="select * FROM DBSAMPLE.EMPLOYEE"; 370 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

385 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm /* diexxx are to notify about termination and maybe do it */ void diehappy(char *reason) { printf("%s\n",reason); } void die(char *reason) { printf("failure because: %s\n",reason); exit(1); } void die2(char *reason,sqlreturn code) { printf("error code: %d\n",code); die(reason); } int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { #define MAX_CONNECTIONS 5 char field1[255]; /* receives values from table row fetch */ char field2[255]; char field3[255]; SQLINTEGER retfld1; /* For completelness. */ SQLINTEGER retfld2; /* For this example, NULL for SQLBindCol */ SQLINTEGER retfld3; /* would be enough */ SQLHENV henv; SQLHDBC hdbc[max_connections ]; /* For multiple connections */ SQLHSTMT statement; SQLRETURN sqe=0; SQLRETURN res=0; /* allocate environment */ if ( SQLAllocEnv(&henv)) die ("Alloc Environment"); /* allocate connection */ if ((sqe=sqlallocconnect(henv,&hdbc[0]))) die2("allocate Connect",sqe); /* connect to data base */ if ( (sqe= SQLConnect(hdbc[0],argv[1],SQL_NTS, argv[2],sql_nts, argv[3],sql_nts)) ) die2("connect",sqe); /* allocate statement(s) */ if (SQLAllocStmt(hdbc[0],&statement)) die("alloc stmt"); /* actual processing */ /* Do query */ if ((sqe=sqlexecdirect(statement,querystring, SQL_NTS))) die2("exec direct",sqe); /* Bind coming SQLFetch operations to fields */ if ((sqe=sqlbindcol(statement,1,sql_char,field1,255,&retfld1))) die2("bind field 1",sqe); if ((sqe=sqlbindcol(statement,2,sql_char,field2,255,&retfld2))) die2("bind field 2",sqe); if ((sqe=sqlbindcol(statement,3,sql_char,field3,255,&retfld3))) die2("bind field 3",sqe); /* While loop to fetch all records */ res = SQLFetch(statement); /* field1,2,3 take new values each time*/ while (SQL_SUCCEEDED(res)) { /* Create tab separated values */ printf("%s\t%s\t%s\n",field1,field2,field3); res= SQLFetch(statement); /* next record */ } /* end actual processing */ /* free statement(s) pretty completely */ if (SQLFreeStmt(statement,SQL_DROP)) die("free Statement with Drop"); /* free connection */ if ((sqe=sqldisconnect(hdbc[0] ))) die2("disconnect ",sqe); Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 371

386 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am if ((sqe=sqlfreeconnect(hdbc[0]))) die2("free Connection",sqe); /* free environment */ if (SQLFreeEnv(henv)) die("free Environment"); diehappy("got to end"); return 0; } To run ODBC, use the following command: #./testodbc dbsample fredyc ter3s1ta Where dbsample is the DSN, fredyc is the i5/os user and t3r3s1ta is the related password of this user. The results of the query are showed in Figure linuxi5new:/tmp #./testodbc dbsample fredyc t3r3s1ta CHRISTINE I MICHAEL L SALLY A JOHN B IRVING F EVA D EILEEN W THEODORE Q VICENZO G RAMLAL V WING JASON R DIAN J GREG KIM N KIYOSHI REBA K ROBERT M EILEEN R MICHELLE F HELENA ROY R Got to end linuxi5new:/tmp # Figure 7-22 Running testodbc program PHP for three-tier applications PHP stands for PHP Hypertext Processor. PHP is a widely-used general-purpose scripting language that is especially well-suited for web development. It is commonly embedded into HTML. PHP is mainly focused on server-side scripting, so you can do anything any other CGI programs can do, such as collect form data, generate dynamic page content, or send and receive cookies. The PHP module provides built-in ODBC functions if compiled with unixodbc support. It can access DB2 UDB for iseries using the iseries ODBC driver. 372 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

387 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm PHP overview On Figure 7-23 we describe the full process. When the Apache web server receives a PHP request from a client web browser, the Apache server forwards the request to the PHP module. The PHP module then finds the source code of the requested PHP page and interprets and executes that source code. If the PHP module finds a database access function in the source code, invokes the iseries ODBC driver to access DB2 UDB for iseries and executes the related SQL statement. The iseries ODBC driver returns the data result set to the PHP module. The PHP module then embeds the resulting data with HTML tags and other content, and forwards it to the Apache server. Apache then sends the HTML page to the client's web browser. Figure 7-23 Apache and PHP with ODBC driver in a Linux partition Installing and configuring PHP for use with ODBC Note: You do not need to recompile anything on SLES 9 to get the iseries ODBC driver to work with either PHP or PHP/Apache. SLES 9 php/odbc/apache fix is now available through the normal SUSE product update channels for PHP/Apache. The steps provided here are for your information only because that happens to be the method we opted at the time of writing. Depending on your default setting of PHP of your Linux operating system version, your PHP applications might encounter the problems at run time. In our case of SLES 9, phpinfo.php ran OK but the application accessing DB2 UDB for iseries over iseries Access driver didn t work. We, therefore, reinstalled Apache and PHP with the latest version at the time of the writing the redbook and downloaded unixodbc source code. 1. Check to see if Apache is installed: # rpm -qa grep apache If it lists an apache.rpm, it needs to be removed: # rpm -e apache_x.x.xx.rpm Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 373

388 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 2. Once it is uninstalled, download the Apache source from the following web site to /usr/local: Then unzip it as illustrated here: # gunzip httpd tar.gz And tar the file: # tar -xvf httpd tar Note that the version of Apache may differ from what we show. 3. Change to the directory you just created: # cd httpd Run the configure script with an option to enable DSO support. The prefix option determines where the root of the http server will reside: #./configure --prefix=/www --enable-shared=max 5. Compile and install Apache: # make # make install 6. If there were no errors, you should verify that unixodbc and iseries ODBC driver are installed. a. To check unixodbc install, type: # rpm -qa grep ODBC You should see the response line similar to: unixodbc b. To check iseries ODBC driver install, type: # rpm -qa grep iseriesaccess You should see the response line similar to: iseriesaccess c. If unixodbc or the iseries ODBC driver are not installed, install them from the Linux distribution CDs with the command: # rpm -Uvh <file name>.rpm 7. Before you can compile the PHP source, you need to verify that either the flex or lex programs are installed. The default installation of SLES 9 for i5 did not install these utilities. Run the following command: # rpm -qa grep flex If nothing is returned, install the flex lexical analyzer from the Linux distribution CDs. 8. You need to verify that the unixodbc source code is available when PHP is compiled. We already verified that the unixodbc binary is installed in step 6 but you need to have its source code. Copy unixodbc-2.x.x.tar.gz to /usr/local and run: # gunzip unixodbc tar.gz And tar the file: # tar -xvf unixodbc tar 9. Do the same for the PHP source code: # gunzip php tar.gz 374 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

389 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm And tar the file # tar -xvf php tar Note: You can download PHP source code from: 10.Change directory to the PHP source directory: # cd php You are now ready to configure PHP. The following command assumes the Apache root directory is /www as done in Step 4. Apxs stands for APache extension. #./configure --with-apxs2=/www/bin/apxs --with-unixodbc=/usr/local/unixodbc # make # make install Note: You must supply the path to the unixodbc source code so it can be used during compilation of PHP. 12.Configure some Apache options so that the PHP script interpreter will run when a web client accesses your.php files. Run the following command: # cp /usr/local/php-5.0.1/php.ini-dist /usr/local/lib/php.ini 13.Edit your httpd.conf file (Located in /www/conf) and make sure the PHP 4 mime type is there and uncommented. You need a line that looks like this: AddType application/x-httpd-php.php 14.The php.ini file contains PHP configuration settings. Copy the php.ini-dist file to /usr/local/lib/php.ini: # cp -f /usr/local/php-5.0.1/php.ini-dist /usr/local/lib/php.ini 15.You are now ready to start the Apache web server: # /www/bin/apachectl start 16.Test the web server and PHP support by creating a file accessible via web client browsers: # echo <? phpinfo()?> > /www/htdocs/ibm/phpinfo.php This creates a simple.php file that you can access from a web browser to test the PHP installation. This PHP application contains information on how PHP was configured and how ODBC support was compiled. Note: You can make your PHP application available to Apache by placing PHP applications in a directory of the Apache documents directory. In our example, we created a directory IBM under the Apache documents directory of /www/htdocs. We place all PHP applications under /www/htdocs/ibm directory. 17.Point your web browser to: server name>/ibm/phpinfo.php as illustrated in Figure Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 375

390 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 7-24 Mozilla - phpinfo() DSO setting in case you do not reinstall PHP from scratch Modules (like PHP) can be installed into Apache statically (during compile of Apache) or as a Dynamic Shared Object (DSO). There are some performance benefits using the static method with the trade-off being ease of maintenance. Further details on the DSO-method versus the static method can be found at: The default installation of the Apache Web server on SUSE LINUX Enterprise distribution comes with DSO support enabled. To check if DSO support is enabled type the following command on command prompt: # httpd -l which should provide you a list of compiled-in modules for Apache. If you find mod_so.c and httpd_core.c in this list then Apache web server is enabled with DSO support. Sample PHP database application for accessing the i5/os IBM provides some PHP sample programs which you can download from the web site at: The application which comes with this download accesses DB2 UDB for iseries data. The database itself is provided by DB2 UDB for iseries itself. using an Apache web server, running in a Linux partition on i5 system, and using the iseries ODBC driver to retrieve data. Figure 7-25 shows a sample 3-tier application that uses PHP and unixodbc to obtain data from iseries DB2 UDB 376 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

391 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm In our example, we extracted the sample PHP programs in /www/htdocs/ibm folder. You are free to run any of these sample programs in any method but we provide one example of navigation. 1. Form your web browser, to open a main window, type: server name>/ibm 2. Click Start from the main window to get the login screen. Type: System name = <i5/os server name>: in our example, it s rchas10 Schema = <collection name>: in our example, it s DBSAMPLE 3. Select employee, then select any employee under that file, for example, Bruce Adamson to get the screen as illustrated in Figure Figure tier application - PHP, unixodbc and DB2 UDB for iseries Note: Also if you want to know more about ODBC functions on PHP go to: Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 377

392 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am emulator The iseries Access for Linux 5250 emulator is a client implementation. It is intended to be used on a Linux client. This version allows multiple Virtual Network Computing (VNC) and Linux Terminal Server Project (LTSP) users to easily use the 5250 emulator. This section covers: Emulator Language support Emulator Modules Some important emulation functions Note: Running ibm5250 as root is not recommended. The default environment variables required to run X applications are not by default, setup correctly when switching to the root user. Running ibm5250 as a normal user after running as root can cause problems (file permissions). A common symptom is that the emulator can not read a config file. Therefore it will revert back to default values Emulator Languages The main emulator window labels and helper applications are translated and will display based on the $LANG system environment variable. The command line value LANGID may also be used to set the language. Table 7-1 lists the current languages supported for setup5250 at the time of the writing this redbook. Table 7-1 Translation language i5/os language Locale Description 2923 nl_nl Dutch 2924 en_us English 2928 fr_fr French 2929 de_de German 2931 es_es Spanish 2932 it_it Italian 2939 de_ch German in Switzerland 2940 fr_ch French in Switzerland 2942 it_ch Italian in Switzerland 2963 nl_be Dutch in Belgium 2966 fr_be French in Belgium 2975 cs_cz Czech 2976 hu_hu Hungarian 378 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

393 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm i5/os language Locale Description 2979 ru_ru Russian (Requires iconv support CP1025) 2981 fr_ca French in Canada 2994 sk_sk Slovakian 2996 pt_br Portuguese in Brazil Note: For Russian language support, you need a version of iconv that supports CP1025. To check, type: iconv -l grep CP1025 Support for more languages are under consideration. Setting language To run setup5250 program and help display you need to validate if your locale language is set correctly to run. Note: From iseries Access for Linux 1.6 release, this verification is not required. At the time of writing of the redbook, we used 1.4 release. Write locale on a Linux terminal window to verify your current language as illustrated in Figure teresa@linuxi5new:~> locale LANG=en_US.UTF-8 LC_CTYPE="en_US.UTF-8" LC_NUMERIC="en_US.UTF-8" LC_TIME="en_US.UTF-8" LC_COLLATE="en_US.UTF-8" LC_MONETARY="en_US.UTF-8" LC_MESSAGES="en_US.UTF-8" LC_PAPER="en_US.UTF-8" LC_NAME="en_US.UTF-8" LC_ADDRESS="en_US.UTF-8" LC_TELEPHONE="en_US.UTF-8" LC_MEASUREMENT="en_US.UTF-8" LC_IDENTIFICATION="en_US.UTF-8" LC_ALL= teresa@linuxi5new:~> Figure 7-26 locale command - en_us.utf-8 In this case, the LANG variable do not match with any supported locale that we illustrated in Table 7-1. There are two options to change the LANG system environment variable: 1. From a Linux terminal window type: export LANG=xx_XX Followed by: Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 379

394 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am export LC_ALL=$LANG where xx_xx is any supported locale. This procedure is only reflected in the Linux terminal window were you typed this procedure. 2. Edit the.profile file of the user that will use the terminal. Add the export options highlighted in Figure This procedure guarantee a permanent environment change and it is reflected in the next log in. # Sample.profile for SuSE Linux # rewritten by Christian Steinruecken <[email protected]> # # This file is read each time a login shell is started. # All other interactive shells will only read.bashrc; this is particularl # important for language settings, see below. test -z "$PROFILEREAD" &&. /etc/profile # Most applications support several languages for their output. # To make use of this feature, simply uncomment one of the lines below or # add your own one (see /usr/share/locale/locale.alias for more codes) # #export LANG=de_DE@euro # uncomment this line for German output #export LANG=fr_FR@euro # uncomment this line for French output #export LANG=es_ES@euro # uncomment this line for Spanish output export LANG=en_US export LC_ALL=en_US # Some people don't like fortune. If you uncomment the following lines, # you will have a fortune each time you log in ;-) #if [ -x /usr/bin/fortune ] ; then # echo # /usr/bin/fortune # echo #fi Figure 7-27.profile After changes write again locale on a Linux terminal window to verify your new current language as illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

395 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm locale LANG=en_US LC_CTYPE="en_US" LC_NUMERIC="en_US" LC_TIME="en_US" LC_COLLATE="en_US" LC_MONETARY="en_US" LC_MESSAGES="en_US" LC_PAPER="en_US" LC_NAME="en_US" LC_ADDRESS="en_US" LC_TELEPHONE="en_US" LC_MEASUREMENT="en_US" LC_IDENTIFICATION="en_US" LC_ALL=en_US Figure 7-28 locale command - en_us Starting a 5250 emulator The emulator consists of two main binaries: ibm5250 and setup5250. ibm5250 ibm5250 will invoke the 5250 emulator and bring up a GUI for the system name, user and password. That information will be used to obtain a 5722-XW1 license on the system so a 5250 session may be brought up. Type ibm help to see command line options. 1. In a GUI terminal session, such as a VNC session, type: ibm5250 <iseries name> 2. This will bring a screen as illustrated in Figure Key in your user and password to login then click OK to open a terminal. Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 381

396 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 7-29 New 5250 Session Then the 5250 emulation is displayed as we shown in Figure Figure Session 382 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

397 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm Multiple users on a single Linux client By default the ibm5250 emulator resource is IBM5250*STAND_ALONE: FALSE. This supports the iseries Access for Linux 5250 emulator as a Linux client implementation. A Linux client is defined as a system with a single Linux user, using one Linux user ID. The emulator may be run on a Linux server (i.e. Linux Terminal Server Project (LTSP), Virtual Network Computing (VNC), remote X sessions (XDMCP or exporting DISPLAY), etc.), but each user will have to specify the -STAND_ALONE command line option or set resource IBM5250*STAND_ALONE: TRUE when launching ibm5250. When -STAND_ALONE is not specified on the commanding or the resource setting is IBM5250*STAND_ALONE: FALSE: 1. The emulator hot-key switching between sessions is allowed. 2. Emulator sessions run as a single process. (shared process mode) 3. Only one user is allowed to run the emulator per Linux system. 4. If multiple users try to launch ibm5250, the emulator will hang. When -STAND_ALONE is specified on the command-line or the resource setting is IBM5250*STAND_ALONE: TRUE: 1. The emulator hot-key switching between sessions is not allowed. 2. Each emulator session runs in its own process. (stand alone process mode) 3. Multiple users are allowed to run on the same Linux system. setup5250 setup5250 is the setup program that may be used to configure resources global (applied to all 5250 sessions) to the user ID and to define multiple connections. 1. In a GUI terminal session, such as a VNC session, type: setup5250 The main menu appears as illustrated in Figure Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 383

398 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure Setup The menu bar has four pulldown lists of Connection, Preferences, Options and Help. 2. First, Connection Description: Use this option to create, edit, browse, copy and remove emulator connections configurations. Also use this option to connect to any particular connection configuration. Select New or Edit from the connection menu bar. If this is your first connection select New. Give a connection description and the Host name or IP address of the i5/os or OS/400 Host as illustrated on Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

399 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm Figure Emulator Connection Then on the same panel, click on Advanced 5250 Connection button if you want to define, as illustrated in Figure 7-33: a. Session Title: This text value appears as the session title. b. Display name: This value determines the 5250 display name. c. Window size: This option allows you to specify the initial size and location of 5250 window. d. Full screen: If this box is checked, the 5250 window will use whole screen. e. Width: This value determines the horizontal width of the window in pixels. f. Height: This value determines the vertical height of the window in pixels. g. Horizontal, vertical and corner offset: Those values determines the distance for whatever corner is specified as the corner to offset value in pixels. h. Emulator User ID: This value is used in the emulator as user ID. i. Emulator password: This value is used in the emulator for password whenever needed. This password is stored encoded. Note: Emulator User ID and Emulator password are used for auto-login and license checking. These two options do not work in playback file. j. Telnet Port: Specify the telnet port for your telnet server. This port is 23 by default. k. Keymap Filename: Specify the full path of the keymap file. l. Keypad Filename: Specify the full path of the keypad file. Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 385

400 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure 7-33 Advanced 5250 Emulator connection Click on OK button to create or submit your edit options. 3. Next stop is Preferences pulldown menu: Use the preferences menu bar to customize your emulator. Preferences apply to all emulator connections, and may be overridden by individual connection configuration options. On the Global 5250 preferences button you can define, as illustrated in Figure 7-33: a. Keyboard remapping: This option allows you to re-map keys in the 5250 emulator. b. Keypad capability: This option allows you to create and use customized keypad buttons. c. Record/Playback capability: This option allows you to record and later playback key sequences in the 5250 emulator. d. Color customization capability: This option allows you to modify colors with in your 5250 emulators. e. 132 Columns: If enabled, the 27 rows by 132 columns screen size will be allowed. f. Column separator: This value enables or disables displaying column separator within certain types of 5250 entry fields. g. Desktop file: This option determines if the 5250 emulator stores and uses the last location and font size of 5250 emulator windows. h. Command menu: This option allows you to enabled or disabled the 5250 menu bar Command choice. If it is disabled you will not have access to new 5250 sessions or be able to exit a 5250 session using the command choice. 386 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

401 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm i. Edit menu: This option allows you to enabled or disabled the Edit choice on the 5250 menu bar. If it is disabled you can not be able to do any copy, cut or paste option. j. Option menu: This option allows you to enabled or disabled the 5250 menu bar Option choice. If it is disabled you will not have access to fonts selection, keypad customization, record/playback selections, color mapping or keyboard remapping. k. New session window: This option allows you to enable or disable starting another 5250 emulator to a different i5/os or OS/400 host. Note: For other options refer to 5250 Preferences Help. Figure Preferences 4. Options: Use the option pulldown menu to change the operation of the setup program or to add a setup program password. 5. Help: In the Help pulldown menu bar, you can learn about the emulation setup program, and bring the program help for the emulator itself. 5250setup example Once you are done with initial connection configuration, you will see the configured connections as illustrated in Figure You select a connection from the list. Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 387

402 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Figure Setup - User connections Then on menu bar select Connection connect to start a 5250 emulation to the selected partition as illustrated in Figure Figure Setup - Connectiong to user connection The customized emulation is illustrated in Figure Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

403 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388chacc.fm Figure customized emulation How to use 5250 emulator for HMC console access The iseries Access for Linux version 1.4 and 5250 emulator, ibm5250, includes support for accessing the iseries console via the HMC Telnet Proxy. To configure the HMC support for the Linux product, use the setup5250 to create a new Connection. On the 5250 Emulator Connection properties page, specify the HMC TCP system name or IP address in the AS/400 Host Name field. On the Advanced 5250 Emulator Connection properties page, use port 2300 in the Telnet Port number field and specify Q#HMC for the Emulator User ID and Emulator Password fields. Note: The special Q#HMC string is not used for security authentication in any way, you will be prompted for additional security values by the HMC Telnet Proxy. Chapter 7. iseries Access for Linux 389

404 6388chacc.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 390 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

405 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388bibl.fm Related publications The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this redbook. IBM Redbooks For information on ordering these publications, see How to get IBM Redbooks on page 391. Note that some of the documents referenced here may be available in softcopy only. Logical Partitions on IBM PowerPC A guide to working with LPAR on Power5 technology, SG Linux on the IBM ~ iseries Server: An Implementation Guide, SG Other publications These publications are also relevant as further information sources: iseries Backup and Recovery, SC Online resources These Web sites and URLs are also relevant as further information sources: Various Linux related information on i5 is available at: V5R3 InfoCenter is available at: IBM eserver i5 and iseries System Handbook for i5/os V5R3 is available at: Workload Estimator (WLE) is available at: General discussion of Webmin is at: How to get IBM Redbooks You can search for, view, or download Redbooks, Redpapers, Hints and Tips, draft publications and Additional materials, as well as order hardcopy Redbooks or CD-ROMs, at this Web site: ibm.com/redbooks Copyright IBM Corp All rights reserved. 391

406 6388bibl.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Help from IBM IBM Support and downloads ibm.com/support IBM Global Services ibm.com/services 392 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

407 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388IX.fm Index Symbols #ELAN 99 %CPU 194 %MEM 194 *GUEST 91 *MDY 362 *NWSSTG 120 *SAVF 239 *STMF 119.odbc.ini 361 /dev/home/homevol 224 /dev/iseries/vda3 339 /dev/sda 126, 222 /dev/sdb 126 /dev/sdb1 224 /dev/sr0 222 /etc/exports 242 /etc/fstab 338 /etc/inittab 340 /etc/lilo.conf 343 /etc/passwd 140 /etc/sysconfig 343 /etc/sysconfig/kernel 343 /etc/unixodbc/odbc.ini 361 /etc/x11/fs/config 354 /home 221 /opt/ibm/iseriesaccess 356 /proc/cpuinfo 14 /QFPNWSSTG 239 /QOPT 119 /usr/local/lib/php.ini 375 /usr/local/src 197 /usr/x11r6/lib/x11/fonts/100dpi 355 unscaled 355 /usr/x11r6/lib/x11/fonts/75dpi 355 unscaled 355 /www/htdocs 375 /www/htdocs/ibm 375 Numerics 100dpi columns x C 14, x B emulation command entry screen emulator terminal setup example XW dpi Q 135 A access point 352 ACL icon 205 Activate Dedicated Service Tools 210 adapter type 74 Add Mount 243 adding ethernet card to Linux partition 216 ADDNWSSTGL 93 ADDTCPIFC 115 advanced system management 3 AIX 5L 2 Apache 138 Apache Apache APache extension 375 Apxs 375 ARP 15 ASCII 251 ASM 3 ASP 13 auto-disconnect option 353 auto-logon using playback file 352 automatic Help key 353 automatic processor movement 4 auto-start 352 auxiliary storage pool 13 B batch sql scripts 352 bckhome.sh 246 Best Fit Fonts 352 blink 353 block 353 boot manager 3 boot mode DIA_DEFAULT 82 DIAG_STORED 82 normal 82 OPEN_FIRMWARE 83 SMS 82 boot time driver 3 browser 373 bus number 222 C C 354 CA 138 CALL 364 Capacity on Demand 14 Caps Lock indicator 353 card position 98 Copyright IBM Corp All rights reserved. 393

408 6388IX.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am cat 236 CB1 102 cd 200 cdrom/suse/ppc 301 Certification Authority 138 CFGD 130, 169, 182 CFGOBJ 239 CGI 372 CHGDSTPWD 208 CHGNWSD 119 CHGTCPA 116 CHGUSRPRF 354 Client Access Express for Windows. 352 client SCSI adapter 78 client server style application 352 clone 13 color customization capability 386 color image 353 column indicator 353 column separator 386 column separator customization 353 command line or program name 194 command menu 386 common errors with Linux installation 267 communication error recovery 353 Contents Area 4 cookies 372 corner offset 385 CPU time 194 CPU usage 194 creating a backup script 246 Cron 248 CRTLIB 239 CRTLINETH 115 CRTNWSD 89 CRTNWSSTG i5/os commands CRTNWSSTG 16 CRTSAVF 239 csm.client 184, 347 csm.core 184, 347 CUoD 12 Cursor style options 353 customizable 353 customizable window title 353 cwbping 356 cwbrunsql 352 D Data Source Administrator 360 DataManagerII 352, 367 DBSAMPLE 368 dedicated processor 11, 67 Dedicated Service Tools 208 default partition profile 10 Default Runlevel 127 desired memory 66 desired processing unit 68 desired value 10 desktop file 386 desktop file for window placement 352 device driver 3 devices.chrp.base.servicerm 184, 347 df 236, 339 DFT = DHCP 133 DHCP Client 135 DIAG_DEFAULT 82 DIAG_STORED 82 diagela 185, 348 DiagELA RPM 347 direct I/O 17 disk drive name 86 display name 385 DLPAR 2, 14 dmesg 219 DMII 352 DNS 133 double click 353 DP mode 353 driver 352 DSN 357 DSO 376 DSPMSG 268 DSPPTF 276 DSPSAVF 260 DSPUSRPRF 354 DST 4, 24, 208 dynamic configuration 96 Dynamic Logical Partitioning 215 dynamic logical partitioning 14 dynamic memory movement 67 dynamic real-time view 193 Dynamic Reconfiguration Option 4 Dynamic Shared Object 376 dynamic window management 352 DynamicRM 184, 347 E EBCDIC 251 echo 223 edit menu 387 Emulator User ID 385 Enter key emulation 353 Enter key location 353 enterprise edition 25 Enterprise Workload Manager 17 Error Log Analysis RPM 347 error log analysis tool 185 estodbc.c 370 ethernet adapter 72 ethernet line description 115 EWLM 17 Expansion Unit 102 exploring Data sources 367 export 379 EXT icon 205 extended 5250 terminal functions Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

409 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388IX.fm F fax viewing 353 Field Exit key location 353 find 252 firmware 2 first boot-up 331 fixed hot spots 353 flash memory 2 FontPath 354 FontPath "Unix/ 7100" 354 foreground color extended attributes 353 free 195 FTP protocol 197 FTP with TSL 197 full system partition profile 10 G gcc 370 general-purpose scripting language 372 glibc globally routable IP addresses 114 GNU C Library 354 gpg 200 granted 95 graphical environment 110 grey scale 353 Grid Toolbox 17 group of partitions 64 gunzip 374 H hardware error 11 hardware management console 4 hardware requirements 32 Hardware tab 191 HMC 4 Contents Area 4 Dynamic Reconfiguration Option 4 Navigation Area 4 Scheduled Operations 4 HMC code update 48 HMC critical console data backup 257 HMC error reporting 263 HMC profiles restore 261 HMC scheduler 4 host logical partition 300 Host name 133 Host Servers 352 hosted 17 Hot spot highlighting option 353 hot spots 353 HTML 372 HTML tag 373 httpd 376 httpd.conf 375 httpd_core.c 376 I I/O allocation 305 I/O pool 13, 71 i5/os 2 i5/os commands ADDNWSSTGL 93 ADDTCPIFC 115 CHGDSTPWD 208 CHGNWSD 119 CHGTCPA 116 CRTLIB 239 CRTLINETH 115 CRTNWSD 89 CRTSAVF 239 DSPSAVF 260 INZTAP 251 PING 116 RST 260 RSTCFG 259 SAV 239 STRSST 93 STRTCPIFC 116 VRYCFG 239 WRKCFGSTS 115 WRKHDWRSC *CMN 89, 115 WRKLIND 98 WRKNWWSTG 88 IBM Director Multiplatform 17 IBM Grid Toolbox 17 ibm , 381 iconv 379 IFS 119 inactivity time 353 Info icon 205 initial geometry 352 initial program load 91 initial window placement 352 input/output device loading 195 installation wizard 123, 162, 276 installed HMC version 263 installed LIC version 263 installer 276 Integrated File System 119 interactive sql 352 INTNETADR 116 INZTAP 251 iostat 195 IP addressing scheme 114 IP Forwarding 134 IPL 91 IPL parameter 91 IPL parameters 120 IPL source 91 IPL stream file 91, 120 IPLPARM 346 IRQ 135 iseries Access for Linux 351 iseries Access for Linux facts sheet 353 iseries Access product line 351 iseries Navigator 24, 86, 91, 97, 116 Index 395

410 6388IX.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am iseries ODBC Driver 352 ISERIES isql 364 isql 352 IXA 353 IXS 353 J jcameron-key.asc 197 K KDE 110, 224 kernel image 120 kernel source 123, 162 kernel-pseries ppc.rpm 301 Keyboard layout 127 keyboard remapping 352, 386 Keymap Filename 385 keypad capability 386 Keypad Filename 385 keyword = value 362 L Language 127 layer 2 bridging 16 LDAP 139 librtas 185, 347 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol 140 limited interactive interface 193 Linux commands cat 236 cd 200 df 236 dmesg 219 echo 223 find 252 free 195 gpg 200 iostat 195 lsscsi 222 rpm -qa grep perl 198 shutdown -h now 190 top 193 vmstat 194 whereis 199 Linux distribution kernel 301 Linux kernel version Linux Terminal Server Project 378 Linux utilities 19 list of fonts 352 list of options 289 list of tasks 193 locale 379 Logical Partition Profile Properties 108 Logical Volume Manager 221 Low Level Firmware 3 LPAR Validation Tool 18 lsscsi 222 LTSP 378 LUN 222 LVM 221 LVT 18, 96 M managed system 5 mapping 117 maximum frame size 335 maximum memory 66 maximum processing unit 68 maximum transfer unit 135 maximum value 10 memory size 66 memory usage 194 menu bar 352 MF , 284, 301 MF , 276, 284 micro-partitioning 11, 67 MIGR 302 migration backing out 348 minimum memory 66 minimum processing unit 68 minimum value 10 mod_so.c 376 monochrome 353 More key emulation 353 mount 339 Mounting the NFS directory to Linux file system 243 MTU 135 multiple users on a single Linux client 383 multi-session support 352 N NAT 15, 114 native I/O resources 190 Navigation Area 4 network address translation 15 Network Address Translator 114 Network Filesystem 243 Network Information System (NIS) 140 network server description 16 network server type 91 new session window 387 next media 276 NFS Export 242 NFS server 240 NI 194 nice value 194 NIS 140 no blink 353 non swaped physical memory used 194 non-hosted 17 normal 82 NVRAM 82 NWSD 16, 80, 85 NWSSTG 16, 85 NWSSTG level backup Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

411 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388IX.fm O ODBC API 352 ODBC configuration 357 ODBC driver 351 odbc.ini 361 ODBCConfig 357 OF 3 Open Firmware 3 Open Terminal Window 144, 171 OPEN_FIRMWARE 83 OpenLDAP 138 openmotif OpenOffice 352 Operator Panel Service Functions 209 optimal processor assignment 11 option menu 387 optional setting 81 overcommitment 10 overcommitted resources 10 P Package Dependencies screen 291 packet filtering 114 parallel printers 353 partition ID 9 partition profile 9 partition profiles backup from HMC 258 Partitioner 225 Partitioning 127 Patch Support Database 138 PC PC5250 emulator session short name 353 PCI adapter 3 PGP key 197 PGP signature 197 PHP 352, 372 PHP 4 mime type 375 PHP Hypertext Processor 372 PHP page 373 PHP source 374 php.ini 375 php.ini-dist 375 PHP/Apache 373 phpinfo.php 373 physical I/O 96 physical shutdown 100 PID 194 PING 116 planning for migration 284 playback 352 playback file 352 pop-up 352 port , 159 POSIX 354 Postscript printers 353 power control 188 power down 80 POWER Hypervisor 2 power up 80 POWER5 2 PR 194 primary color extended attributes 353 primary partition 4, 227 priority 194 priviledges 94 Process ID 194 process manipulation 193 process status 194 Processors and Memory tab 192 profile name 305 profile summary 83 provisioning 17 proxy ARP 15, 114 PSDB 138 pull down keypads 352 pull downs 352 PuTTY 21, 120, 159, 286 Q QFPNWSSTG 285 QOPT 119 QUSER 354 R rdist 347 record/playback 352 recovery CD media 51 Redbooks Web site 391 Contact us xi RedHat Enterprise Linux AS 3 intro 19 registration 84 Release notes 141 Remote Administration screen 137 remote partition virtual slot number 76 remote printers 353 removing ethernet card from i5/os 214 RES 194 resource name 98 resource sharing 13 restarts 193 restoring NWSD 259 restricted state 18 revoked 95 RMC 184, 347 rmtcmd 357 root=/dev/sda3 130, 170, 182 route 114 Routing 134 row indicator 353 RPM 183 RPM rpm -qa grep 100dpi 354 rpm -qa grep openmotif 354 rpm -qa grep perl 198 rpm -qa grep unixodbc 354 rsct.core 184, 347 rsct.core.utils 184, 347 Index 397

412 6388IX.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am RST 260 RSTCFG 259 RTAS 3 rtas_errd 185 Rule line 353 Run-Time Abstraction Services 3 S S 194 Samba 3 LDAP schema 284 Samba LDAP configuration 284 SAV 239 Save file 239 saving current Linux server 285 scaleable fonts 354 Scheduled Operations 4 scheduling backup 247 SCP 22 screen print 353 SCSI bus 222 secure FTP transfer 197 select 365 serial printers 353 server-side scripting 372 Service Focal Point 82 service partition 11 service processor 2 3 Service Tools user profile 93 session ID 353 session level color mapping 352 session title 385 settable 5250 display names 352 setup SFTP 22 shared memory size 194 shared processor 11, 67 shared processor pool 11 shared processor units 12 sharing mode 69 Shift indicator 353 SHR 194 shutdown -h now 190 simultaneous multi-threading 14 single click 353 SLES 9 intro 19 minimum I/O requirements 285 minimum memory requirements 285 minimum processor requirements 285 SLES 9 migration steps from iseries to i5 300 SLIC 3 slot number 74 SMS 3, 82 SMS boot screen 84 SMT 2, 14 socket 352 Software 127 source server 300 SP 2 3 SRC 350 src 184, 347 SSH 21, 219 SST 24 standard edition 25 Start YaST Control Center 299 STRHOSTSVR 354 STRSST 93 STRTCPIFC 116 sub processor feature 67 SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 intro 19 swap memory 195 swap utilization 194 switchable independent disk pool 13 sysstat 195 System DSN 358 system firmware 3 System Licensed Internal Code 3 System Management Services 82 system management services 3 system profile 10 System Service Tools 93 system summary information 193 systems provisioning 17 T TAB 147, 173 tar 375 target number 222 target server 301 TCP/IP routing 114 telnet 85 Telnet Port 385 Time Zone 127 TIME+ 194 top 193 columns header 194 message/prompt line 194 summary area 194 task area 194 translator 117 transparent subnetting 114 trunk adapter 16 type-ahead customization 353 U underscore 353 unixodbc driver manager 354 unixodbc driver manager package 364 upgrading your Linux server to SLES URL hot spots 353 V valid service tools profile 286 VE 13 VIRT 194 virtual adapter 72 virtual adapter slot Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

413 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388IX.fm Virtual Aliases 135 virtual CD 16, 129, 168, 180 virtual console 277 virtual device 72 virtual ethernet benefits 15 virtual ethernet adapter 14, 79 virtual I/O 14, 17 virtual I/O server 18 virtual LAN 14 virtual LAN connection 114 virtual line description 115 virtual memory used in the task 194 Virtual Network Computing 21, 378 virtual position 85 virtual processor 69 virtual SCSI adapter 16, 74 Virtual SCSI Adapter Properties 73 virtual SCSI chain 221 virtual SCSI server adapter 90 virtual serial adapter 16, 121, 159 virtual slot number 74 virtual tape 16, 251 virtualization engine 13 vmstat 194 VNC 21, 124, 162, 378 VNC Client 124, 162 VNC Server 124, 162 VRYCFG 239 W web browser 373 Web-based System Manager 9 Webmin 21, 196 webmin-1.xxx.tar.gz 197 webmin-1.xxx.tar.gz-sig.asc 197 webpages 352 WebSM 9 whereis 199 window size 385 WinSCP 22, 197 WRKCFGSTS 115 WRKHDWRSC *CMN 89, 115 WRKLIND 98 WRKNWWSTG 88 X xterm 145 Y YaST 19, 141 yast2 199 Yellow Pages 140 YP 140 Index 399

414 6388IX.fm Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 400 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide

415 To determine the spine width of a book, you divide the paper PPI into the number of pages in the book. An example is a 250 page book using Plainfield opaque 50# smooth which has a PPI of 526. Divided 250 by 526 which equals a spine width of.4752". In this case, you would use the.5 spine. Now select the Spine width for the book and hide the others: Special>Conditional Text>Show/Hide>SpineSize(-->Hide:)>Set. Move the changed Conditional text settings to all files in your book by opening the book file with the spine.fm still open and File>Import>Formats the Conditional Text Settings (ONLY!) to the book files. Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388spine.fm 401 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide (1.5 spine) 1.5 <-> <->1051 pages Linux on i5: Implementation Guide (1.0 spine) <-> <-> 788 pages Linux on i5: Implementation Guide (0.5 spine) <-> <-> 459 pages Linux on i5: Implementation Guide (0.2 spine) 0.17 <-> <->249 pages (0.1 spine) 0.1 <-> <->89 pages

416 To determine the spine width of a book, you divide the paper PPI into the number of pages in the book. An example is a 250 page book using Plainfield opaque 50# smooth which has a PPI of 526. Divided 250 by 526 which equals a spine width of.4752". In this case, you would use the.5 spine. Now select the Spine width for the book and hide the others: Special>Conditional Text>Show/Hide>SpineSize(-->Hide:)>Set. Move the changed Conditional text settings to all files in your book by opening the book file with the spine.fm still open and File>Import>Formats the Conditional Text Settings (ONLY!) to the book files. Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am 6388spine.fm 402 Linux on i5: Implementation Guide (2.5 spine) 2.5 <->nnn.n 1315<-> nnnn pages Linux on i5: Implementation Guide (2.0 spine) 2.0 <-> <-> 1314 pages

417

418 Draft Document for Review May 9, :07 am Back cover Linux on IBM Eserver i5 Implementation Guide Planning and configuring the system for Linux servers on eserver i5 Installation guide of Linux distribution on eserver i5 Users guide for iseries Access for Linux This redbook is about Linux implementation on new IBM eserver i5. With brand new technologies of POWER5 and IBM Virtualization Engine, Linux on i5 is even more powerful, scalable, and flexible. We also have new versions of Linux distributions are available for Linux on iseries. They are SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES) 9 and Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) 3. This redbook will make you ready to plan, configure, and install Linux on i5. It discusses the migration issues of Linux from previous iseries systems to i5. It also covers various helpful topics of administrations, operations, and tips and techniques. Discussion of iseries Access for Linux is also included with the topics of iseries Access for Web, ODBC driver and 5250 emulation features. INTERNATIONAL TECHNICAL SUPPORT ORGANIZATION BUILDING TECHNICAL INFORMATION BASED ON PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE IBM Redbooks are developed by the IBM International Technical Support Organization. Experts from IBM, Customers and Partners from around the world create timely technical information based on realistic scenarios. Specific recommendations are provided to help you implement IT solutions more effectively in your environment. For more information: ibm.com/redbooks SG ISBN